Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Veg2000 - V4.3.107a - Eng PDF
Veg2000 - V4.3.107a - Eng PDF
Veg2000 - V4.3.107a - Eng PDF
w ift w up cn
w
.u .c w .u
.c w p- n w
-li
f w p
n w li .u t.c w
w ft w p n w
-li
ft
.u .c w .u .c
w p- n w
-li
f w p n
w li .u t.c w
w ft w p n w
-li
ft w
.u .c w .u .c
n w
-li
f w p n w
w
p-
li .u t.c w w
w ft w p- n w
-li
f w
.u
.u .c w .u t.c p-
n w li ft w p n w
p-
li .u .c w w lif
t.c
ft w n w
-li
f .u n
.c w
p-
.u t.c w p
n w li ft w p n w -li
-li .u .c w w ft w
ft w n w
-li
f .u .c
.c w
p- t.c w p n
n w li .u n w -li
.u
ft
.c w p w ft w
w n w -li .u .c w
w
p- w f w p n w
i
li .u t.c w
w ft w p n w
-li
ft w
.u
p
.u .c w .u .c
w n w
-li
f n w
LIFT
Revision 0
w p
12/09/2013
w
p-
li .u t.c w w
w ft w n w
-li .u
V4.3.A7A
ft w
ENGLISH
.u .c p-
n w li .u .c w
p-
p- w ft w p n w lif
li .u .c w .u t.c
ft w n w
-li
f n
USER MANUAL
VEG2000
.u .c p-
n w li .u t.c w
p-
V4.3.107A
p- w ft w p n w lif
li .u .c
n w -li .u t.c
ft w w f n
CONTROL BOARD
.c w
p-
.u t.c w p
n w li ft w p n w -li
.u .c w w ft w
w n w
-li
f .u .c w
w
p- t.c w p n
w li .u n w -li
.u
ft
.c w p w ft w
n w -li .u .c w
p- w f t.c w p n w
li .u n w -li .u
ft
.c w p w ft w
n w -li .u .c w
p-
w f t. w p n w lif
.
n w w
w ift w up cn
w
.u .c w .u
.c w p- n w
-li
f w p
n w li .u t.c w
w ft w p n w
-li
ft
.u .c w .u .c
w p- n w
-li
f w p n
w li .u t.c w
w ft w p n w
-li
ft w
.u .c w .u .c
n w
-li
f w p n w
w
p-
li .u t.c w w
w ft w p- n w
-li
f w
.u
.u .c w .u t.c p-
n w li ft w p n w
p-
li .u .c w w lif
t.c
ft w n w
-li
f .u n
.c w
p-
.u t.c w p
n w li ft w p n w -li
-li .u .c w w ft w
ft w n w
-li
f .u .c
.c w
p- t.c w p n
n w li .u n w -li
.u
ft
.c w p w ft w
w n w -li .u .c w
w
p- w f w p n w
i
li .u t.c w
w ft w p n w
-li
ft w
.u
p
.u .c w .c
Rev 1.0
w n w
-li
f .u n w
w p
LAYOUT
w
p-
li .u t.c w w
w ft w p- n w
-li
ft w
.u
.u .c w .u .c p-
n w li ft w p n w
p-
li .u .c w w lif
t.c
ft w n w
-li
f .u n
.u .c w
p-
.u t.c w p-
n w li ft w p n w
p-
li .u .c w w lif
t
ft w n w
-li
f .u .c
.c w
p- t.c w p n
n w li .u n w -li
.u
ft
.c w p w ft w
w n w -li .u .c w
w
p- w f t.c w p n
w li .u n w -li
.u
ft
.c w p w ft w
n w -li .u .c w
p- w f t.c w p n w
li .u n w -li .u
ft
.c w p w ft w
n w -li .u .c w
p-
w f t. w p n w lif
.
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
w
lif
.u
.c
w
p-
t
lif
SUMMARY
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
-li
w
w
w
ft
w
-li
w
.u
.c
p
w
ft
n
1. FAULT MESSAGES ................................................................. 1
n
.u
.c
-li
w
.c
ft
w
1.1 Description .................................................................................... 1
p
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
p
w
ft
n
p
.u
.c
-li
1.3
w
Fault Reading ................................................................................ 1
.u
.c
ft
w
p
w
ft
n
1.4 Fault List Total Clearing .................................................................. 1
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
1.5 Fault List ....................................................................................... 2
ft
p
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
p
w
2. BOARD PROGRAMMING ........................................................ 4
w
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
.u
t.c
p
2.4 Defaults Tables .............................................................................. 9
w
n
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
2.4.3 Default “Parameters Table” ................................................................................. 10
p
w
n
up
f
n
.u
2.5 Programmable Inputs/Outputs (0/23)............................................ 11
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
f
2.5.1 Programmable I/O (0-23) .................................................................................... 11
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
p
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
w
3.1.1 PRESET Switch ................................................................................................... 14
p
w
ft
w
.u
3.1.2 DATA Push-Button .............................................................................................. 14
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
.
3.2 System’s Operative Modes Overview ............................................. 15
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
n
.u
w
p-
ft
li
w
.u
p-
w
w
ft
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
ft
.c
li
p-
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
PASSWORD .......................................................................................... 20
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
w
ft
.c
li
w
p-
w
p-
ft
n
.u
li
w
.u
p-
w
w
w
ft
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
i
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
w
lif
.u
.c
w
p-
w
4.2.2 Inputs................................................................................................................ 22
t
lif
n
w
.u
4.2.3 Outputs ............................................................................................................. 22
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
4.3 Electrical Drawing ........................................................................ 23
w
.u
.c
-li
w
w
w
ft
w
n
5. WIRINGS DESCRIPTION ...................................................... 24
-li
w
.u
.c
p
w
ft
n
5.1 0 – 23 ......................................................................................... 24
n
.u
.c
-li
w
.c
w
5.2 A/B/C/D....................................................................................... 24
ft
w
p
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
p
w
ft
n
p
.u
5.4 ALT ............................................................................................. 24
.c
-li
w
.u
.c
ft
w
p
5.5 AP/CP/CRP .................................................................................. 24
w
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
w
5.6 AP2 ............................................................................................. 24
p
w
ft
p
.u
-li
5.7
w
APA ............................................................................................. 24
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
n
5.8 APG............................................................................................. 25
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
p
w
5.9 AUX1/AUX2/AUX3 ........................................................................ 25
w
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
w
f
cn
.u
5.11 CCO /CCC/ CCS ............................................................................ 25
t.c
-li
w
w
w
w
f
5.12 CL ............................................................................................... 25
n
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
5.13 KE/ KI/ DEX/DIN .......................................................................... 25
p
w
n
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
5.14 CM1/CM2..................................................................................... 25
t.c
w
w
w
f
n
-li
5.14.1 w
CM1 ............................................................................................................... 25
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
5.15 CPF ............................................................................................. 26
p
w
n
up
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
5.17 CS ............................................................................................... 26
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
w
5.19 CT ............................................................................................... 27
w
p
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
5.20 EM .............................................................................................. 27
w
p
w
ft
w
.u
5.21 EXC ............................................................................................. 27
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
5.23 FS3 ............................................................................................. 27
p-
ft
w
li
w
.c
.
p-
w
w
w
ft
5.25 GN .............................................................................................. 27 w
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
w
p-
ft
li
w
.u
.c
ft
n
n
.u
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
li
p-
w
5.30 OM .............................................................................................. 28
p-
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.u
p-
ft
w
w
ft
li
w
.c
li
w
p-
w
p-
ft
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
.u
.c
w
p-
ft
w
5.36 RU .............................................................................................. 29
n
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
ii
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
w
lif
.u
.c
w
p-
w
5.37 SCP ............................................................................................. 29
t
lif
n
w
.u
.c
5.38 SNR ............................................................................................ 30
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
5.39 TD/TS ......................................................................................... 30
.c
-li
w
w
w
ft
w
p
5.40 TG .............................................................................................. 30
-li
w
.u
.c
5.40.1 TG Delay ....................................................................................................... 30
p
w
ft
n
n
.u
5.41 TM .............................................................................................. 30
.c
-li
w
.c
ft
w
p
ft
5.42 TO .............................................................................................. 30
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
5.43 TP ............................................................................................... 30
p
w
ft
n
p
.u
.c
-li
w
.u
ft
w
p
w
ft
n
5.44 TSD............................................................................................. 30
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
p
5.45 VIM ............................................................................................. 31
w
ft
p
.u
-li
w
.u
w
w
p
w
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
p
w
5.46.2 Led Fault ........................................................................................................ 31
w
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
w
w
p
w
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
w
w
f
6. ARCHITECT System’S SPECIFICATION ................................ 32
n
-li
w
.u
t.c
p
6.1 Door Pre-Opening ........................................................................ 32
w
n
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
6.2 Starting y/ ................................................................................. 32
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
p
w
n
up
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
6.5 Landing and Slowing Down Zone ’s Magnetic Sensors Layout ........ 33
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
6.6 Enlarged Slowing Down Zone and Non-Regular Floor Distances ...... 35
w
p
w
p
f
n
.u
6.7 Delayed Stopping ......................................................................... 40
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
w
w
p
w
f
6.8 Photocells and Safety Reopening System ....................................... 40
n
-li
w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
w
6.9 Gong ........................................................................................... 40
p
w
ft
w
.u
li
w
.u
p-
w
w
w
ft
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
.
p-
ft
w
n
.u
.c
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
ft
.u
.c
li
w
.c
ft
w
ft
li
w
.c
li
p-
w
p-
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
p-
ft
w
w
ft
.c
li
w
p-
w
p-
.u
li
w
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
6.17 Plant Types: Single Automatic Push Button (Single Call), Collective or
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
iii
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
w
lif
.u
.c
w
p-
w
6.17.1 Single Automatic Push Button Plant (Single Call) ................................................ 44
t
lif
n
w
.u
6.17.2 Down Collective Plant ...................................................................................... 44
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
6.17.3 Up / Down Collective ....................................................................................... 44
w
.u
.c
-li
w
6.17.4 Duplex Plant ................................................................................................... 44
w
w
ft
w
n
6.17.5 Duplo ............................................................................................................. 45
-li
w
.u
.c
6.17.6 Multiplex Plant ................................................................................................ 45
p
w
ft
n
n
.u
6.18 Inverter / Electronic Unit Management .......................................... 45
.c
-li
w
.c
ft
w
p
6.19 Speed.......................................................................................... 45
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
6.19.1 One Speed ..................................................................................................... 45
p
w
ft
n
p
.u
6.19.2 Two Speeds .................................................................................................... 45
.c
-li
w
.u
.c
ft
w
6.19.3 Three Speeds ................................................................................................. 45
p
w
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
7. CONTROLS ......................................................................... 46
p
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
7.1 Safety Circuit ............................................................................... 46
w
p
w
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
p
w
w
f
n
.u
7.3 Maximum Travel .......................................................................... 46
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
7.5 Movable Platform ......................................................................... 47
w
w
f
n
-li
w
.u
p
w
n
7.7 Doors Zone .................................................................................. 48
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
8. SIGNALLING ....................................................................... 49
t.c
-li
p
w
n
up
f
n
.u
8.1 Position /Arrival /Reservation ........................................................ 49
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
p
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
8.1.4 Reservation Signalling ......................................................................................... 51
w
w
p
w
f
n
-li
w
f
8.2 Direction...................................................................................... 51
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
w
.u
li
w
.u
.c
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
.
p-
w
8.6 Skipping The Floor Indication on Serial Display .............................. 54
w
w
ft
w
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
w
p-
ft
w
9. OPERATIONS ...................................................................... 55
ift
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
ft
li
w
.c
li
p-
w
p-
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
p-
ft
w
w
ft
.c
li
w
p-
w
ft
n
.u
li
w
.u
p-
w
w
w
ft
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
iv
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
w
lif
.u
.c
w
p-
w
9.8.1 Hand operation................................................................................................... 59
t
lif
n
w
.u
9.9 Syncronizing/Phasing ................................................................... 59
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
n
9.10 Fire Service.................................................................................. 59
w
.u
.c
-li
w
w
w
ft
9.10.1 Fire Service Mode ............................................................................................ 59
w
-li
w
.u
9.10.2 Firefighters Service Mode (EN 81-70) ................................................................ 59
.c
p
w
ft
n
Amendament A3 ................................................................................... 60
n
.u
.c
-li
w
.c
ft
w
p
ft
-li
w
10. SERIAL Expansions .......................................................... 63
.u
.c
-li
p
w
ft
n
p
.u
.c
-li
w
.u
.c
ft
Serial Display.................................................................................................................. 64
w
p
w
ft
-li
w
.u
10.2 Car’s Serials (VEG400, SERCAR_LCD) ............................................ 64
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
p
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
..................................................................................................................................... 65
w
w
p
w
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
p
w
10.2.3 Using Two Car’s Serial Board ............................................................................ 72
w
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
w
w
p
w
n
10.3.1 Floors’ Serial boards (VEG602, VEG701, FLOORDIS, VEG800,
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
ITF800,LCD600,LCD601) ................................................................................................. 76
w
w
f
n
-li
10.3.2 w
Collecting external calls with VEG400 ................................................................ 81
.u
t.c
p
w
n
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
n
up
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
p
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
w
w
p
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
w
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
.
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
w
p-
ft
w
ift
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
p-
ft
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
p-
w
p-
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
w
p-
w
p-
ft
n
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
v
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
w
lif
.u
.c
w
1.
p-
t
lif
n
w
.u
.c
FAULT MESSAGES
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
-li
w
w
w
ft
w
-li
w
1.1DESCRIPTION
.u
.c
p
w
ft
n
n
.u
System fault will be shown with its own blinking code on the board display and if it persists for more than two seconds
.c
-li
w
.c
ft
it will be stored in memory.
w
p
ft
-li
w
Board can store in memory up to 32 faults, then it continues overwriting the older ones.
.u
.c
-li
w
Together with the fault code is stored also the time in hours (up to a maximum of 99 hours) elapsed since the previous
p
w
ft
n
p
.u
failure.
.c
-li
w
.u
.c
ft
In case of wrong insertion of microcontroller on the socket, board display is off and leds on the external display are on.
w
p
w
ft
-li
w
In case of shortcut on transistor outputs, leds on the external display will blink.
.u
.c
-li
w
w
1.2FAULT CLASSIFICATION
p
w
ft
p
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
Faults are grouped in three categories (A, B, C) on the basis of their effect on the system.
w
p
w
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
p
w
w
f
n
.u
FAULT
-li
w
.u
DESCRIPTION
t.c
w
CATEGORY
w
p
w
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
With blinking code each call is denied.
w
w
f
n
-li
w
.u
t.c
A
Fault will remain even if power line is deactivated.
w
p
w
n
f
n
.u
Keep SPEEDY button pressed for 2 seconds to reactivate the system, or activate program mode and set
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
the value ‘0’ at the address 41, or put the system in maintenance mode.
w
w
f
n
-li
Interlocking plant until fault is present. w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
Calls are accepted even with blinking code.
p
w
n
B
up
f
n
.u
Code keeps blinking until next call is done or power line is deactivated or manual cancel is performed
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
or SPEEDY button is pressed.
w
f
n
-li
w
f
Programming errors.
.u
t.c
-li
w
They are not stored in faults history.
p
w
p
f
n
.u
C Wrong values set during programming.
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
w
Programming halt for 2 seconds with a fixed programming error code.
w
p
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
w
.u
Faults of types A and B block the normal service and car cannot move until faults persist.
li
w
.u
.c
p-
1.3FAULT READING
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
To read the last 32 faults stored in memory you must press simultaneously SPEEDY and DATO push buttons.
p-
ft
w
To display the fault you must press these keys for at least 1 second. Once the code is shown, releasing the keys the fault
li
w
.u
.c
.
p-
w
is cancelled (to cancel the fault, after you release the keys you must wait one second without any pressing).
w
w
ft
.u
.c
li
w
.c
w
Faults are shown starting from the most recent.
p-
ft
w
ift
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
To cancel all the faults from the list with a single operation, you must keep pressed SPEEDY button and hit 3 times
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
DATO. You must wait at least half of a second between each DATO hit and, at the 3rd hit, SPEEDY and DATO must
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
li
p-
w
p-
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
w
p-
w
p-
ft
n
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
1
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
w
lif
.u
.c
w
p-
w
1.5FAULT LIST
t
lif
n
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
n
FAULT FAULT Ref.
w
.u
FAULT DESCRIPTION
.c
-li
CODE w CATEGORY paragraph
w
w
ft
w
n
Missed start due to malfunction of the safety contact or safety contact has been
-li
w
5.17 CS
.u
0 – 31 B
.c
opened during the run and operator couldn’t close the doors.
p
w
ft
n
IF , ICV sensor doesn’t match doors zone sensor (APA), IF or ICV fault, or APA
n
5.7 APA
.u
.c
-li
37 w B 5.26 ICV/IF
.c
fault.
ft
w
p
Failed floors count ascending. IF/DB or ICV/DA sensors don’t switch properly or
ft
-li
w
.u
wrong floors number (address ‘32’ value greater than effective floors number).
.c
-li
38 B 5.26 ICV/IF
p
w
ft
n
Stop at top or bottom floor.
p
.u
.c
-li
wFailed floors count descending. IF/DB or ICV/DA sensors don’t switch properly
.u
.c
ft
or wrong floors number (address ‘32’ value greater than effective floors number).
w
39 B 5.26 ICV/IF
p
w
ft
-li
w
Stop at top or bottom floor.
.u
.c
-li
w
w
Stop zone not found: wrong placement sensors or IF fault if IF/ICV.
p
40 B 5.26 ICV/IF
ft
p
.u
41 B DRS or DRD sensors always opened or wiring fault. 5.35 RD/RS
-li
w
.u
t.c
6.6 Delayed
w
Stop zone too short or stop delay too long (address ‘26’ ).
w
42 B
p
w
n
Stopping
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
ICV slowing down sensor fault (IF/ICV configuration only). Stop on the floor on
w
43 B 5.26 ICV/IF
p
w
IF.
w
f
n
.u
‘High speed’ contactor’s solenoid or doors opening relays jammed
-li
44 B w 5.8 APG
.u
t.c
w
w
45 B Missed start during phasing procedure. 5.17 CS
p
w
w
f
.u
46 B 5.16 CPP
t.c
-li
w
w
47 B Ascent or Descent contactors jammed. 5.44 TSD
w
w
f
n
Faulty operator during opening. Doors partially opened or still closed. (APG
-li
w
.u
48 B 6.12 Doors
t.c
p
w
n
Opening doors contactor fault or wiring fault with doors still closed or safety
f
5.8 APG,
n
.u
t.c
49 B
-li
w
contact fault with opened doors. (APG closed, CS closed) 6.12 Doors
t.c
w
w
w
f
5.16 CPP
n
Closing doors contactor fault or wiring fault with doors still opened or safety
-li
w
f
.u
50 B 5.17 CS
t.c
-li
p
w
n
up
5.19 CT
f
n
.u
51 B Descent contactor coil fault or wiring fault
t.c
-li
w
5.44 TSD
t.c
w
5.19 CT
w
f
n
5.44 TSD
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
53 B 5.16 CPP
w
p
w
DRS always closed or RS input always to ground or wrong floors number (address
p
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
54 B/A 32 is less than effective floors number ). (at the second fault in a row the halt is 5.35 RD/RS
t.c
t.
w
w
permanent)
p
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
p
(address 32 is less than effective floors number ). (at the second fault in a row the
w
.u
halt is permanent)
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
7.6 Engine
w
ft
Temperature
w
.u
FS3 input doesn’t switch from lower floor (RD) to the upper one (RS).
.c
li
w
57 A 5.23 FS3
w
p-
ft
3.2.3
w
.c
.
Mode
p-
w
w
w
ft
3.2.3
n
Lift stops’ number faulty (> 32 or < 2). Value stored is maintained. w
n
.u
59 C Programming
.c
li
w
.c
w
Mode
p-
ft
w
Operator faulty in closing doors and doors partially opened or completely opened
ift
li
w
61 B 6.12 Doors
.u
.c
ft
62 B
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
64 B 5.8 APG
ft
li
w
65 B 5.16 CPP
.c
li
p-
w
p-
7.2 Re-opening
w
ft
.u
.c
li
w
.u
p-
ft
w
… … …
w
…
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
w
TO
w
p-
ft
Fault inverter, make sure that the inverter is not in fault status. verifies that
n
.u
li
w
.u
p-
w
w
w
ft
closed.
n
w
.u
.c
li
w
7.3 Maximum
w
ft
w
76 B It occurs when the maximun travel time (TMC) expires for the first time
n
Travel Time
li
w
.u
p-
w
Maximum travel time for floor approaching in down direction expired. 7.3 Maximum
w
ft
77 B Travel Time
n
.u
.c
li
w
2
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
w
lif
.u
.c
w
p-
t
It occurs when the maximun travel time (TMC) expires for the first time.
lif
n
w
The lift is not blocked and you can try again.
.u
.c
p-
w
w
Maximum travel time for high speed in up direction expired.
ft
w
7.3 Maximum
.u
78 B It occurs when the maximun travel time (TMC) expires for the first time .
.c
-li
w Travel Time
w
The lift is not blocked and you can try again.
ft
w
n
Maximum travel time for high speed in down direction expired.
-li
w
.u
.c
7.3 Maximum
79 B It occurs when the maximun travel time (TMC) expires for the first time .
p
Travel Time
ft
n
The lift is not blocked and you can try again.
n
.u
.c
-li
w Maximum travel run time expired.
.c
ft
w
p
It occurs after two consecutive times that the maximum travel time expires.
ft
n
7.3 Maximum
-li
w
80 A
.u
Travel Time
.c
The first time the maximum travel time expires one of the fault 76, 77, 78 or 79
-li
p
w
ft
occurs, according to the state the lift was, when the time TMC has expired.
n
p
.u
.c
-li
w 5.10 BAT
.u
.c
5.20 EM
w
81 A System overrun.
ft
w
p
5.21 EXC
w
ft
-li
w
5.35 RD/RS
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
p
.u
-li
w
.u
5.35 RD/RS
t.c
w
w
84 A 7.4 Run
p
w
n
descent)
w
Direction
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
3.2.3
p
w
85 A Reserved
w
Programming
p
f
n
.u
Mode.
-li
w
.u
t.c
Error control of the switch 1 on the brake or on the second descent valve 9.11
w
w
p
w
86 A Amendament
w
f
cn
.u
A3
t.c
-li
w
w
Error control of the switch 2 on the brake or on the second descent valve 9.11
w
w
87 A Amendament
f
n
-li
w
.u
A3
t.c
…
w
88 A Shaft access attempt (Valid for systems without heading).
p
w
n
f
n
.u
89 A Fault control A3 amendment failed
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
… … … …
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
n
System Reset – MCLR from run
up
92 (*) B
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
93 (*) B
w
w
f
n
94 (*) B
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
95 (*) B
w
p
w
… … …
p
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.
w
w
… … …
p
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
(*)The alarms 85, 86, 87, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95 and 98 are referred to the diagnostics of the board. If any of this alarms
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
.u
li
w
.u
.c
1.6IMMEDIATE INFORMATION
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
When the system is in Running mode you can display the active state of some system signals, pressing DATA push
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
.
p-
w
w
w
ft
CODE DESCRIPTION w
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
w
0-31 Missed expansion serial at floor XX, if the code is equal at number of floor (add. 32) no
p-
ft
w
ift
.c
p-
41 ALT pressed.
w
w
ft
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
li
45 Overload (CCS).
p-
w
p-
ft
.u
.c
li
w
.c
p-
ft
w
ft
li
w
.u
49 Emergency (EM)
.c
li
w
p-
w
p-
ft
n
.u
.c
p-
52 Inspection (MAN).
w
w
ft
.c
li
w
54 Internal mode
p-
ft
w
55 Duplex mode
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
3
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
2.
w
w
w
lif
.u
.c
BOARD PROGRAMMING
w
p-
t
lif
n
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
2.1 “PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTION” TABLE
.c
-li
w
w
w
ft
w
-li
w
.u
.c
ADDRESS DATA DESCRIPTION REF.
p
w
ft
n
0 No beep on car push button AP2 = second entrance door opening activation
n
.u
.c
5.38 SNR,
-li
w
.c
1 No beep on car push button AP2 signals the activation of Inspection Mode 5.6 AP2
ft
0
w
p
ft
2 Beep on car push button AP2 = second entrance door opening activation 6.12.6 Multi-
-li
w
.u
Entrances
.c
-li
3 Beep on car push button AP2 signals the activation of Inspection Mode
p
w
ft
n
0 OPEN DOORS parking Plant with 2 speeds
p
.u
.c
-li
4 w
OPEN DOORS parking Plant with 1 speed
.u
.c
6.14 Parking
ft
1
w
8 CLOSE DOORS parking Plant with 2 speeds
p
w
6.18 Speed
ft
-li
w
.u
12 CLOSE DOORS parking Plant with 1 speed
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
p
.u
-li
w
.u
w
w
p
w
w
f
.u
t.c
16 Normal selector (ICV) Automatic doors
-li
w
p
w
(CP= Closing door command)
w
6.11 Near
f
n
.u
-li
w (AP= Opening first door activation) Landing and
.u
t.c
w
32 Long selector (ICV) Manual doors Slowing Down
w
p
w
n
6.12 Doors
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
(AP= Gong activation)
w
w
f
48 Long selector (ICV) Automatic doors
n
-li
w
.u
t.c
p
w
n
(AP= Opening first door activation)
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
0 Internal mode
t.c
w
5.27 INT
w
w
5.37 SCP
f
n
-li
w
f
6.12.6 Multi
.u
Entrances
w
3
p
w
n
6.17 Inverter
up
f
n
.u
64 Three entrances
t.c
-li
w
Management
t.c
w
w
f
Mode
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
p
.u
-li
w
.u
t.
w
w
p
w
f
during inspection service mode
n
9.6 Inspection
-li
w
f
4
.u
.c
Mode
-li
w
2 Stopping at extreme landing during Inspection operation in high speed, low speed on
w
p
w
ft
.u
li
w
.c
p-
w
w
ft
w
.u
8.1.3 Arrival
w
4 Arriving with fixed light Plant immediately in Halt (look at the Note)
p-
Signalling,
ft
w
5 8.5 ‘Reserved’
n
.c
Signal
.
p-
12 Arriving with blinking light Plant immediately in Halt (look at the Note)
w
w
w
ft
.u
.c
li
w
w
7.5 Movable
p-
6
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
ft
.u
Slowing Down
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
Sensor Layout
ft
li
w
.u
p-
w
p-
ft
n
n
.u
1 1 GONG in up and 1 in down direction Arrival and Position separated (serial outputs
.c
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
w
ft
8
li
w
.u
6.8 Gong
.c
li
w
p-
ft
.u
li
w
.u
3 1 GONG in up and 2 in down direction Arrival and Position separated (serial outputs
.c
p-
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
64
n
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
4
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
w
lif
.u
.c
ADDRESS DATA DESCRIPTION REF.
w
p-
t
lif
n
0 Gong on speed change Synchronizing/phasing at landing 0
w
6.8 Gong
.u
.c
p-
4 Gong on speed change Synchronizing/phasing at the upper landing
w
9.7 Synchronizing
w
9
ft
n
8 Gong on car stopping Synchronizing/phasing at landing 0
w
.u
.c
-li
w 12 Gong on car stopping Synchronizing/phasing at the upper landing
w
w
ft
w
Door’s control disabled (control panel without
p
0 Sent alarm signalling on landing serial
-li
w
.u
.c
board (ref. Serial board user manual) doors contactors AP and CP, board doors
p
w
ft
operator)
n
n
.u
Sent alarm signalling on landing serial Door’s control enabled (control panel with doors
.c
-li
16 w
.c
ft
board (ref. Serial board user manual) contactors AP and CP, direct command door
w
p
ft
-li
w
motor)
.u
.c
-li
5.12.1 Doors
Door’s control disabled (control panel without
w
10 32 Without Sent alarm signalling on
p
w
ft
Controls
n
p
landing serial board (ref. Serial board doors contactors AP and CP, board doors
n
.u
.c
-li
w
.u
.c
ft
w
p
w
n
48
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
Without Sent alarm signalling on contactors AP and CP, direct command door
p
w
ft
landing serial board (ref. Serial board motor)
p
.u
-li
user manual) w
.u
t.c
w
w
11 0 Serial wiring disabled
p
w
w
f
.u
64 Serial wiring enabled Parallel Wiring
t.c
-li
w
p
0 Operator OFF during run return at floor 0 after 14 minutes ENABLED
w
w
f
n
.u
(hydraulic plants only)
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
1 Operator OFF during run return at floor 0 after 14 minutes DISABLED
w
p
w
n
(hydraulic plants only) 6.12 Doors
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
12
w
6.14.1 Parking
2 Operator ON during run return at floor 0 after 14 minutes ENABLED
w
Operation
w
w
f
(hydraulic plants only)
n
-li
w
.u
t.c
p
w
n
(hydraulic plants only)
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
w
2.5 Programmable
w
f
n
input/output
-li
w
f
t.c
9.7 Synchronizing
-li
w
12 Synchronizing after call COLLECTIVE PLANT
p
w
n
up
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
w
5.26 ICV/IF
p
f
n
-li
w 6.5 Landing and
f
.u
t.c
-li
16 DA-DB (ref. Picture No.1) Collective plant Easy management Slowing Down
w
p
w
Zone’s Magnetic
p
14
f
n
.u
Sensor Layout
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
32 ICV-IF (ref. Picture No.1) Collective plant Standard management 6.16 Plant type
w
w
p
w
8.2 Direction
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
w
48 ICV-IF (ref. Picture No.1) Collective plant Easy management
p
w
ft
w
.u
li
w
.u
5.26 ICV/IF,
.c
w
w
ft
15 w
Slowing Down
.u
.c
li
w
64 Zone’s Magnetic
w
p-
ft
Sensor Layout
w
li
w
.u
.c
.
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
n
.u
.c
li
w
NOTE: if immediate halt is programmed with ‘4’ or ‘12’ at address 5, board performs the following functions :
.c
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
p-
w
w
ft
.u
.c
li
w
enable phasing with stop or maintenance out of floor in high speed plants
.c
p-
ft
w
ft
li
w
.u
Halt after return to floor 0 (programming ‘0’ or ‘1’ at the address 5) happens only in the following
.c
li
p-
w
p-
ft
conditions:
n
.u
.c
li
w
elevator is hydraulic
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
ft
li
w
.u
p-
w
p-
ft
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
5
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
w
lif
.u
.c
w
p-
2.2 “PROGRAMMABLE TIMES” TABLE
t
lif
n
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
-li
w LIMIT
w
ADDRESS LABEL DESCRIPTION REF.
ft
w
p
VALUES
-li
w
.u
.c
5.33 PCP
p
w
ft
n
6.9 Immediate
16 2 – 45 sec. TAP Opening doors waiting time
n
.u
.c
-li
w Starting
.c
6.12 Doors
ft
w
p
2 – 45 sec.
ft
n
17 TOP Maximum time door opening command is active. 6.12 Doors
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
18 2 – 45 sec. THC Maximum time door closing command is active. 6.12 Doors
p
w
ft
n
Door opening delay after stop at floor and delay on door opening
p
2 – 99 tenths
n
.u
.c
-li
w
.u
19 TRA (pre-opening) earlier then the detection of APA signal with safety 6.12 Doors
.c
of sec.
ft
w
circuit (TRA>=70, delay=TRA-70).
p
w
ft
-li
w
0 – 99 tenths
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
of sec
ft
p
.u
5.17 CS
Maximum time between door closure and ‘no car start’ fault is
-li
w
.u
10 – 99 sec.
t.c
w
w
signalled.
p
w
Devices
w
f
.u
Maximum travel run time. Maximum timeout during which drive
t.c
-li
w
p
w
commands are activated between floors (they are reset next to the
w
f
7.3 Maximum
n
.u
22 10 – 99 sec TMC stopping zone and to the slowing down zone)
-li
w
.u
Travel
t.c
w
w
p
w
w
control disable.
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
w
6.11 Enlarged
w
w
w
Slowing Down
p
f
n
1 – 99 tenths
-li
w Zone and Non-
.u
p
w
n
Distances
f
n
.u
6.18 Speed
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
6.12 doors
0 – 99 tenths
w
w
Time during which the “Busy” signal is ON after start closing doors.
p
f
24 TOC 8.6 Reserved
n
-li
of sec w
f
.u
Signal
t.c
-li
w
OLEODINAMIC plant:
p
w
n
up
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
f
5.40 TG
0 – 99 tenths
n
* If TST <70 and it is an odd value, the board check the activation of
-li
w
f
.u
25 TST 5.43 TP
t.c
-li
p
w
ROPE plant:
p
Starting
f
n
.u
-li
w
t.c
t.
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
0 – 99 tenths
.c
-li
w
26 TRIF Stop delay after magnetic sensors stop area detection 5.17 CS
w
p
w
of sec.
ft
w
.u
1 – 99 x 10 Waiting time since quenching ‘busy’ signal before moving the car to
li
w
.u
.c
w
sec.
w
w
ft
.c
li
w
1 – 99 min.
w
28 SBA input) and no further A (alarm) button press. 6.3 Battery
p-
ft
w
(99 → No detachment)
n
li
w
.u
.c
.
0-93= TMR3 between FS3 input and CPF output [dec. of sec.]
p-
w
5.15 CPF
w
w
ft
94= TMR3 between FS3 input and CPF output , value =addr. 27 [minutes].
n
5.23 FS3
0 – 99 tenths w
n
.u
w
of sec
p-
96= CPF is used as the output enable forced closure and alarm sound’s.
w
Mode
>= ’97’, the CPF output signal drive the high speed.
li
w
.u
.c
p-
9.1 Re-levelling
w
w
ft
5.33 PCP
n
.u
.c
li
w
0 – 99 sec.
p-
30 RIP
w
Opening
ft
w
Exclusion
li
w
.u
During Testing
.c
li
p-
w
Operation
p-
ft
5.18 CS1
n
.u
0 99 tenths of
.c
li
w
.u
p-
sec.
w
ft
w
6.15 timers
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
w
p-
w
p-
ft
n
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
6
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
2.3“PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETERS” TABLE
w
lif
.u
.c
w
p-
t
lif
n
LIMIT
w
.u
.c
ADDRESS LABEL DESCRIPTION REF.
p-
w
w
VALUES
ft
w
.u
.c
-li
32 w 2 – 32 NF Total number of landings 6.12.6 Multi-
w
entrances
ft
w
p
Underground floors 8.1.2 Underground
0 – 78
n
33 NS
-li
w
Floors
.u
.c
Standing floor
p
0 – 32
w
34 NST
ft
6.14 Parking
n
(Return after the time programmed at address 27 )
n
.u
.c
-li
w 6.11 Enlarged
.c
First irregular floor (lower interfloor distance than normal) or landing next to
ft
w
Slowing Down
p
ft
n
0 – 99
-li
w
35 PB1 Zone and Non-
.u
.c
-li
p
w
ft
n
Distances
p
.u
.c
6.14.2 Parking
-li
w First landing with reversed parking state of the door.
.u
.c
ft
w
p
w
ft
Close Doors
-li
w
.u
Second landing with reversed parking state of the door. 6.14.2 Parking
.c
-li
w
w
37 0 - 32 SPA2 With Open or
p
w
ft
p
Close Doors
n
.u
-li
w
.u
Sensors unlinked up with the car serial board (Ref. Serial boards user manual) 7.5 Movable
t.c
w
Platform
w
( 0 = none, 1 = RS, 2 = RD, 4 = ICV, 8 = IF, 16 = CCC, Sum = more sensors at the
p
0 – 31
w
38 EIS
n
10.2.1 Wiring to
w
f
same time).
.u
the VEG0400 Car
t.c
-li
w
Serial Board
p
w
Landing fireman (ref.‘Fire service mode’)
w
39 0 – 32 NPM
p
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
Second irregular floor (lower interfloor distance than normal) or landing next 6.11 Enlarged
t.c
w
w
Slowing Down
p
to enlarged slowing down zone, adding 50 to the corresponding landing.
w
n
40 0 – 99 PB2 Zone and Non-
w
f
cn
.u
( Irregular distance from the floor above ).
t.c
-li
w
Regular Floor
w
w
Distances
w
f
n
-li
w
.u
t.c
Third irregular floor (lower interfloor distance than normal) or landing next to 6.11 Enlarged
w
p
w
n
Slowing Down
enlarged slowing down zone, adding 50 to the corresponding landing.
f
n
.u
0 – 99
t.c
42 PB3
-li
w
w
Regular Floor
w
w
f
Distances
n
-li
w
f
.u
0 – 32
t.c
43 PPE Emergency landing called (automatic call) but only in down direction
-li
9.2 Emergency
w
p
Tenths of sec. – Delay time on switching contactors’control TS, TD, TP, TG,
w
n
6.12 Doors
up
44 0 - 99 RITUSC
n
.u
t.c
-li
RCP, RAP
t.c
w
Tenths of sec. – Delay time on control inputs EXC, ALT, CS, RD, RS, TSD, 6.12.1 doors
w
f
n
controls
-li
45 0 - 99 RITING w
f
9.6 Inspection
t.c
-li
w
Mode
p
w
.u
-li
w
.u
Decades/Units of the max number of working hours or of time elapsed for six-
t.c
t.
w
47 0 - 99 DU
w
p
w
monthly check
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
six-monthly check
w
.u
li
w
.c
p-
w
w
ft
49 0 – 99 CDM If CDM = 90 it is enabled the hours counter for the six-monthly check. w
.u
.c
li
w
w
If CDM > 90 it is enabled the hours counter for the six-monthly check with
p-
ft
w
the activation of the SAR output to signal that the time (4300h) has expired.
li
w
.u
.c
.
1–7
p-
w
w
w
ft
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
53 1–7 POR3 Car entrances at landing 3 Sum = more entrances at the same
ift
li
w
.u
6.12.6 Multi-
w
1–7
ft
55 POR5
n
.u
ft
1–7
w
li
w
1–7
.u
p-
w
1–7
p-
59 POR9
ft
n
n
.u
.c
6.12.1
li
w
.u
Doors’Control
p-
60 0 - 99 NUMCH
ft
w
ft
li
w
Expansion
.u
.c
li
w
p-
w
p-
ft
n
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
7
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
Serial boards calls management (ref. Serial boards user manual)
w
lif
.u
1 = external serial enabling (VEG0400) and exclusion of landing serial boards
.c
w
(VEG800, ITF800, LCD600, VEG0700, FLOORDIS…)
p-
t
2.5 Programmable
lif
n
2 = Car serial board exclusion (VEG400, SERCAR...)
w
Inputs/Outputs
.u
.c
p-
5.2 A/B//C/D
w
4 = Car wiring (parallel)
w
w
ft
8.1 Position
n
8 = up reservation activation
w
/Arrival/
.u
.c
-li
w 16 = position coded on 0-23 Reservation
w
61 0 -63 CESER
ft
6.4 Serial or
w
p
32 = A,B,C,D binary (no inverted binary)
n
Parallel Wiring
-li
w
.u
64 = Multiplexing on call’s inputs. 10.1.3 Landing
.c
w
Calls Management
p
Programming '16’ = position and ‘32‘= decoded binary encoding is
ft
n
9.3 Platform
n
.u
Management
.c
-li
w activated gray code on ABCD and the 7-segment code on the outputs
.c
ft
w
P0, P1 ....
p
ft
-li
w
.u
sum = more options at the same time
.c
-li
p
w
1 = Local input MAN n.c.
ft
n
p
.u
.c
2 = ptc probe (TM n.o.) and oil temperature (TO) exclusion
-li
w 7.1 Safety Circuit,
.u
.c
ft
4 = CS1 safety circuit control enabling
w
p
w
ft
Opening,
n
8 = Input APA→ re-levelling zone and door pre-opening
-li
w
.u
7.6 Engine
0 – 99
.c
-li
62 NSEC
w
p
w
ft
9.1 Relevelling
p
.u
9.3 Platform
-li
w
.u
Management
t.c
w
w
p
w
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
p
w
w
6.11 Enlarged
f
n
.u
-li
4 = duplex plant w Slowing Down
.u
t.c
w
w
8 = low speed mode between not regular floors
p
w
Regular Floor
n
63 0 - 63 MISC
w
f
Distances
cn
.u
t.c
-li
w
6.16.4 Duplex
w
32 = hoistway without head and pit
w
7.5 Movable
w
f
n
-li
w
.u
t.c
p
w
n
… … … … …
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
w
w
0 – 99 (encoder increment)
f
81 DFR
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
82 0 – 99 Not used
w
p
w
n
0 – 99
up
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
w
0 – 99
p
f
85 D2P (x 50 encoder increments) deceleration distance V2P
n
-li
w
f
.u
0 – 99
t.c
-li
p
w
f
n
.u
-li
w
t.c
t.
w
w
f
0 – 99
n
89 DCP
-li
w
f
.u
maintenance)
.c
-li
w
p
Multiplex index for connection with MCU Control board (RS232).
w
ft
w
.u
90 0-99 Note: put +16 if the version of the supervision software for PC is previous
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
version V4.3.0
w
w
ft
.c
li
w
91 0-15
w
MCU board than the other simplex
p-
ft
w
.c
.
p-
w
w
93 0-99 VMN
w
ft
from 0 to 7 V) w
n
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
ift
95 0-99
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
.u
0-99
.c
97
li
w
0-98=monitoring I/O
.c
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
li
0=Italian;
p-
w
p-
ft
.u
.c
li
w
2= France;
.u
.c
p-
ft
ft
li
w
0=Normal mode
.u
.c
li
w
p-
w
2=Test input(output);
p-
ft
99 0-99
n
.c
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
8
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
2.4DEFAULTS TABLES
w
lif
.u
.c
w
p-
w
The control board is provided with the following default configuration.
t
lif
n
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
2.4.1 Default “Functions Table”
w
ft
w
.u
.c
-li
w
w
w
ft
w
-li
w
.u
.c
ADD. DATA DESCRIPTION
p
w
ft
n
0 01 Beep on car push buttons disabled
n
.u
.c
-li
w
.c
ft
w
p
ft
n
2 16 Normal selector (ICV) – Automatic Doors
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
3 00 Internal mode
p
w
ft
n
p
.u
Inspection operation in high speed, low speed on synchronizing magnetic sensors (RS, RD)
.c
-li
w
.u
4 02
.c
w
Stop at furthermost floors in inspection operation
ft
w
p
w
ft
-li
w
5 04 Arriving with blinking light - Plant immediately in Halt
.u
.c
-li
w
w
Full Load Sensor not managed (CCC) – Hydraulic plant
p
6 16
ft
p
.u
-li
7 00 w
Normal slowdown magnetic sensors placement
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
8 01 1 GONG in up and 1 in down direction - Arrival and Position separated (serial outputs type B)
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
p
w
w
f
Without Sent alarm signalling on landing serial board - Door’s control disabled
n
.u
10 32
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
11 64 Serial wiring enabled
p
w
w
f
cn
.u
12 03
t.c
-li
w
w
w
13 04 Automatic Synchronizing - COLLECTIVE PLANT
w
f
n
-li
16 DA/DB – Collective plant easy management w
.u
14
t.c
p
64
w
n
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
n
up
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
16 12 s TAP
w
p
w
p
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
w
w
p
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
w
21 30 s TMP Maximum time between door closure and ‘no car start’ fault is signalled = 30s
n
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
.c
li
w
Time during which the “Busy” signal is ON after start closing doors. = 5s
w
24 50 t. TOC
p-
ft
w
.c
.
p-
w
26 04 t. TRIF Stop delay after magnetic sensors stop area detection = 0.4s
w
w
ft
27
.u
.c
li
w
.c
w
p-
28 60min SBA Battery detachment time after Emergency procedure activation = 60 min
w
ft
w
ift
li
w
.c
p-
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
p-
ft
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
p-
w
p-
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
w
p-
w
p-
ft
n
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
9
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
w
lif
.u
.c
w
p-
t
2.4.3 Default “Parameters Table”
lif
n
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
-li
IND. wDATO LABEL DESCRIPTION
w
w
ft
w
p
8 NP 8 floors
n
32
-li
w
.u
.c
33 10 NS Not underground floors
p
w
ft
n
34 32 NST Not parking floor
n
.u
.c
-li
w
.c
ft
w
p
ft
n
36 32 SPA1
-li
w
.u
None parking floor at open doors
.c
-li
37 32 SPA2
p
w
ft
n
p
.u
.c
-li
31 EIS w
.u
38
.c
ft
w
p
w
ft
-li
w
39 00 NPM Fire service floor= floor 0
.u
.c
-li
w
w
40 32 PB2 None couple of near landing
p
w
ft
p
.u
41 00 SBL Unlocking code
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
42 32 PB3 None couple of near landing
w
p
w
w
f
.u
43
t.c
-li
w
p
44 15 RITUSC Rebound time on output relays (S, D, P, G, CP, AP) = 1.5s
w
w
f
n
.u
-li
w
Rebound time on input relays (EXC, ALT, CS, RD, RS, TSD, APG, CPP, EM, CS1)
.u
t.c
06 RITING
w
w
45 = 0.6s
p
w
w
f
cn
.u
46 05 LETT Rebound time (Delay) on calls = 0.05s
t.c
-li
w
w
w
47 00 DU
w
f
n
-li
48 00 MC w
It is enabled the hours counter.
.u
t.c
p
49 90 CDM
w
n
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
50 01 POR0
t.c
w
w
w
51 01 POR1
p
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
52 01 POR2
t.c
-li
p
w
53 01 POR3
n
For any stops, doors opening side is ‘1’
up
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
54 01 POR4
t.c
w
w
55 01 POR5
p
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
56 01 POR6
t.c
-li
p
w
57 01 POR7
p
f
n
.u
-li
w
58 01 POR8
.u
t.c
t.
w
w
59 01 POR9
p
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
p
w
ft
.u
li
w
.u
p-
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
w
p-
ft
w
63 9 MISC
li
w
.u
.
p-
w
w
w
99 Encoder disabled
ft
80
n
w
n
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
Number of floors missing from the bottom of a multiplex system with MCU board
ift
91 00
li
w
.u
p-
w
w
ft
.u
.c
li
w
98 01 LANG
p-
ft
1=English;
w
ft
li
w
99 00 0=Normal mode
.u
.c
li
p-
w
p-
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
w
p-
w
p-
ft
n
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
10
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
w
lif
.u
.c
w
2.5PROGRAMMABLE INPUTS/OUTPUTS (0/23)
p-
t
lif
n
w
.u
.c
p-
w
In the control board, there are 24 proglammable I/O. This inputs/outputs are multiplexed on the control boards connectors
w
w
ft
w
0-23. This I/O are used to collect calls in parallel mode and to provide the relative light signaling.
.u
.c
-li
w
w
w
ft
w
n
2.5.1 Programmable I/O (0-23)
-li
w
.u
.c
p
w
ft
In the table below are represented the most relevant I/O mappings for single call systems. In the table is also specified the
n
n
.u
.c
-li
w
programming of the control board (at address 13 and address 61) to obtain the desired I/O mapping.
.c
ft
w
p
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
PARALLEL SERIAL
p
w
ft
n
p
.u
.c
-li
w
.u
.c
ft
w
CONTROL
p
w
ft
n
Parallel + +
-li
w
BOARD
.u
Car Serial
.c
-li
w
PIN (*) (One pole for floor position) Position with DEC16 Position with DEC16
p
w
ft
p
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
Dw Dw Dw Dw
w
p
w
w
reserved/ reserved/ reserved/ reserved/
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
Single call Single call Single call Single call
p
w
w
f
n
.u
0 --- S/L0 C/L0 --- D/L0 C/L0 --- S/L0 --- D/L0
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
1 S/L0 D/L1 C/L1 S/L0 D/L1 C/L1 S/L0 D/L1 S/L0 D/L1
p
w
w
f
cn
.u
2 D/L1 D/L2 C/L2 D/L1 D/L2 C/L2 D/L1 D/L2 D/L1 D/L2
t.c
-li
w
w
w
3 S/L1 D/L3 C/L3 S/L1 D/L3 C/L3 S/L1 D/L3 S/L1 D/L3
w
f
n
-li
4 D/L2 D/L4 C/L4 D/L2 D/L4 wC/L4 D/L2 D/L4 D/L2 D/L4
.u
t.c
p
5 S/l2 D/L5 C/L5 S/L2 D/L5 C/L5 S/L2 D/L5 S/L2 D/L5
w
n
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
6 D/L3 D/L6 C/L6 D/L3 D/L6 C/L6 D/L3 D/L6 D/L3 D/L6
t.c
w
w
w
7 S/L3 D/L7 C/L7 S/L3 D/L7 C/L7 S/L3 D/L7 S/L3 D/L7
p
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
8 D/L4 C//L0 C/L8 D/L4 D/L8 C/L8 D/L4 D/L8 D/L4 D/L8
w
p
w
n
9 S/L4 C/L1 C/L9 S/L4 D/L9 C/L9 S/L4 D/L9 S/L4 D/L9
up
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
10 D/L5 C/L2 C/L10 D/L5 D/L10 C/L10 D/L5 D/L10 D/L5 D/L10
t.c
w
w
f
11 --- C/L3 C/L11 S/L5 D/L11 C/L11 S/L5 D/L11 S/L5 D/L11
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
p
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
14
w
w
p
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
w
16 C/L4 P0 P4 C0/L0 C/L4 C/L16 P0 P4 D/L8 D/L16
p
w
ft
w
.u
17 C/L5 P1 P5 C1/L1 C/L5 C/L17 P1 P5 S/L8 D/L17
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
18 P0 P2 P6 C2/L2 C/L6 C/L18 P2 P6 D/L9 D/L18
w
w
ft
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.c
.
p-
w
w
ft
w
n
.u
w
p-
ft
w
Max.
ift
li
w
.u
N° 6 8 12 8 12 24 8 12 12 24
.c
p-
w
w
STOPS
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
p-
ft
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
LEGEND
p-
w
p-
ft
C/Ln = call push button at landing ‘n’ placed in car with its light
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
p-
ft
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
w
ft
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
NOTE : Pn lamps can signal even the blinking arrival programming the values ‘0’ or ‘2’ (arrival+position) at the address
w
.u
.c
li
w
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
11
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
n w w
w ift w up cn
w
.u .c w .u
.c w p- n w
-li
f w p
n w li .u t.c w
w ft w p n w
-li
ft
.u .c w .u .c
w n -li
Serial
w f w p n
Parallel
p-
w li .u t.c w
w ft w p n w
-li
ft w
.u .c w .c
+
+
n -li .u w
Car
Car
w f n
serial
w p
Serial
p- w
DEC16
DEC16
Parallel
w Parallel
li .u t.c w
w ft w p- n w
-li
f w
.u
.u .c w .u t.c p-
n w li ft w p n w
p-
li .u .c w w lif
t.c
ft w n w
-li
f .u n
.c w
p-
.u t.c w p
n w
Single call
Single call
Single call
Single call
w li n -li
Dw reserved/
Dw reserved/
Dw reserved/
Dw reserved/
ft w p w
Up/Dw reserved
Up/Dw reserved
Up/Dw reserved
Up/Dw reserved
-li .u .c w ft w
Single call (only car)
Single call (only car)
ft w n w
-li
f .u .c
.c w
p- t.c w p n
n w li .u n w -li
.u
ft
.c w p w ft w
w n w -li .u .c w
p- w f w p n w
+0
+8
+2
+4
w
+16
+24
+12
+18
+20
+28
li .u t.c w
12
w ft w p n -li .u
Address 61
.u .c w w ft w p
w n w
-li
f .u .c w
w
p- t.c w p n w
w li .u n w -li .u
.u
ft
.c w p- w ft w
n w li .u .c w
p-
p- w ft w p n w lif
.u .c w
+0
+4
+4
+0
+4
+4
+0
+0
+4
+4
+0
+0
+0
+4
+4
li n -li .u t.c
ft w p- w f w n
Address 13
.u .c w .u t.c p-
n w li ft w p n w
p-
li .u .c w w lif
t
ft w n w
-li
f .u .c
.c w
p- t.c w p n
n w li .u n w -li
.u
ft
.c w p w ft w
n w .u .c w
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
-li
+2
w p- w f w p n
w .u t.c w
Address 63
w li n -li
ft w p w w
The table below describes the values to be set to the addresses 61, 13 and 63 to get the maps as per the table previous.
.u .c w ft
n w
-li
f .u .c w
p- t.c w p n w
li .u n w -li .u
ft
.c w p w ft w
n w -li .u .c w
p-
w f t. w p n w lif
.
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
3.
w
w
w
lif
.u
.c
MULTIFUNCTION KEYPAD
w
p-
t
lif
n
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
n
DISP900
w
.u
.c
-li
w
w
w
ft
w
-li
w
.u
.c
p
w
The multifunction keypad DISP900 allows to configure all the parameters and function of the control board, allows to
ft
n
n
.u
.c
-li
w
dysplay and to manage the alarm information, allows to monitor the state (active or inactive) of some I/O signals. It is
.c
ft
w
possibile to mount the DISP900 keypad both in horizontal position and vertical position.
p
ft
-li
w
At address 98 it is possible to select the language for the programming Keypad DISP900: program value ‘0’ for Italian or
.u
.c
-li
w
value ‘1’ for English.
p
w
ft
n
p
.u
.c
-li
w
.u
.c
ft
w
ADDRESS 98:
p
w
ft
-li
w
Set ‘0’ for italian language
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
p
.u
Set ‘1’ for english language
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
p
w
w
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
.u
t.c
p
w
n
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
MAN
w
p
w
n
NORM
up
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
PROG
t.c
w
w
Push-Button
f
n
Switch
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
Programming Keypad DISP900
w
p
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
w
w
p
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
Control
w
p
w
ft
w
.u
Board
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
n
Micro
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
.
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
w
p-
ft
w
ift
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
.u
.c
li
w
.c
p-
ft
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
p-
Control
w
p-
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
Board
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
w
Micro
p-
w
p-
ft
n
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
13
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
3.1MULTIFUNCTION KEYPAD COMPONENTS
w
lif
.u
.c
w
p-
w
The multifunction keypad DISP900 is composed of:
t
lif
n
w
.u
a 16x2 LCD display for the visualization of the informations;
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
a three positions switch that allows to select operative mode of the control board;
w
.u
.c
-li
w
four multifunction push-buttons (SPEEDY, DATA, UP e DOWN) which allow the managment of programming
w
w
ft
w
operations and control board’s informations;
-li
w
.u
.c
p
w
ft
n
3.1.1 PRESET Switch
n
.u
.c
-li
w
.c
It allows to change the operational mode of the control board between “Running mode” (if placed in NORM position), in
ft
w
p
ft
n
“Programming mode” (if placet in PROG position) and in “Inspection mode” (if placed in MAN position).
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
Ref paragraph 3.2.3
p
w
ft
n
p
.u
.c
-li
w
.u
.c
w
3.1.2 DATA Push-Button
ft
w
p
w
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
p
n
.u
If it is pressed during standard system working, it is possible to display IMMEDIATE INFORMATIONS, (
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
display the state of several signals). Ref paragraph 1.6
w
p
w
n
w
f
Pressed together with SPEEDY push button, allows the board last stored faults consultation. Ref. paragraph 1.3
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
In PRESET mode, that is during memory programming (Programming mode), displays the current data stored in
p
w
w
f
n
.u
memory at a specific address. Ref. paragraph 3.2.3
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
.u
t.c
During permanent halt, allows the system manual unblocking (after solving the fault reason). Ref. paragraph 1.2
w
p
w
n
f
Pressed together with DATA push button, allows the board last stored faults consultation. Ref. paragraph 1.3
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
During PRESET mode, that is during memory programming (programming mode), if pressed together with UP or
w
w
f
n
DOWN push button, allows to speed up the flow of the parameter list to reach faster the desired parameter (speeding
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
n
up
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
3.1.4 UP Push-Button
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
p
w
p
During PRESET mode, that is during memory programming (programming mode), increases the value on the
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
display. Ref paragraph 3.2.3.
w
w
p
w
f
n
In Inspection mode, this push button moves the car in UP direction. Ref paragraph 9.6
-li
w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
If pressed in Running Mode it activates an automatic call to the top floor if the board is programmed for single call
w
p
w
ft
w
mode or for collective mode. If the board is programmed for “Man-Present” operation it moves the car in up direction
n
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
until the car reaches the top floor or until the push button is released.
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
ft
w
li
w
.c
.
p-
w
w
w
ft
During PRESET mode, that is during memory programming (programming mode), decreases the value on the w
n
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
In Inspection mode, this push button moves the car in DOWN direction. Ref paragraph 9.6
ift
li
w
.u
.c
If pressed in Running Mode it activates an automatic call to the lowest floor if the board is programmed for single
p-
w
w
ft
call mode or for collective mode. If the board is programmed for “Man-Present” operation it moves the car in up
n
.u
.c
li
w
direction until the car reaches the lowest floor or until the push button is released.
.c
p-
ft
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
p-
w
p-
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
w
p-
w
p-
ft
n
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
14
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
3.2SYSTEM’S OPERATIVE MODES OVERVIEW
w
lif
.u
.c
w
p-
w
The multifunction Keypad DISP900 permits to manage the operative mode of the control board and to display useful
t
lif
n
w
informations:
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
Start-up: in this working mode you can check the firmware version installed in the microcontroller.
w
.u
.c
-li
w
Running Mode: you can monitor in real time the state (active or inactive) of inputs RS, RD, IF and ICV, you can
w
w
ft
w
p
have informations on working time of the systems, on system code number (if one had been assigned with the
-li
w
.u
.c
supervision software), on current position and next destination of the car.
p
w
ft
Programming Mode: in this working mode you can program the various parameters and functions of the control
n
n
.u
.c
-li
board. w
.c
ft
w
Inspection Mode: you can enter inspection mode and move the car using the the switch and the push-buttons on the
p
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
p
w
ft
n
Alarm Check Mode: you can check the alarm archive stored in the control board memory.
p
.u
.c
-li
w
Input Status Check: you can monitor the state of some input signals of the control board.
.u
.c
ft
w
p
w
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
The figure below shows the state transition of the informations displayed on the multifunction keypad’s display.
-li
w
p
w
ft
p
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
p
w
w
Control board
p
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
Power on
t.c
w
w
p
w
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
.u
t.c
p
w
n
f
Start Up
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
control board
w
n
up
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
MAN MAN
p
NORM NORM
n
.u
Programming
-li
w
t.c
Mode
t.
w
w
p
w
f
n
-li
System Serial Number w
f
.u
p
w
ft
.u
li
w
MAN
.u
.c
MAN
p-
NORM
w
NORM
w
PROG
w
ft
PROG
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
.
p-
w
+
w
w
ft
w
n
.u
.c
li
w
SPEEDY + DATA
.c
w
p-
or
w
Releasing
ft
w
Releasing
ift
Occurrence of an Keep
n
SPEEDY e DATO
li
w
.u
p-
w
DATA Push-Button
w
ft
Push-Button
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
p-
ft
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
p-
w
Status
p-
Alarm
w
ft
Visualization Visualization
n
.u
.c
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
li
w
the System
.u
.c
li
w
p-
w
p-
ft
n
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
15
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
3.2.1 Start-Up
w
lif
.u
.c
When the control board is powered, the display on the multifunction keypad visualize the firmware version installed on
w
p-
t
the control board microcontroller.
lif
n
w
.u
.c
An example of the start-up screen is shown in figure below.
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
-li
w
w
w
ft
w
-li
w
.u
.c
V4.3.XXX
p
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
-li
w
.c
ft
w
p
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
Firmware
p
w
ft
n
p
Version
n
.u
.c
-li
w
.u
.c
ft
w
p
w
ft
-li
w
3.2.2 Running Mode
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
p
In running mode, you can monitor in real time on the display the state of inputs RS, RD, IF e ICV (0 = inactive and 1 =
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
active), you can have informations on working time of the systems and on system code number (if one had been assigned
w
w
p
w
n
with the supervision software).
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
Also you can check the current position and next destination of the car (blinking signalling). If the car is idle and there
p
w
w
aren’t other calls to serve, the field of the display reserved to the next destination signalling remains off and only the
p
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
w
Status of
w
0 = Inactive
w
System Serial Number
w
inputs
p
f
n
-li
w
.u
t.c
p
w
n
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
MATrXXXX1011
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
Uni 10
w
p
w
n
up
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
Status Code
f
n
-li
w
f
Current
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
(Blinking)
p
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
w
w
p
w
f
n
-li
w
f
In the table below are listed the inputs’ active state codes that are displayed during the normal working of the system.
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
w
.u
li
w
CODE DESCRIPTION
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
w
.u
.c
li
w
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
.
p-
w
w
w
ft
.u
.c
li
w
.c
w
p-
CCC input signal active. Full Load sensor active. Note: this code is displayed only if the Full Load check
w
ft
w
CCC
ift
.c
p-
w
CCO input signal active. Movable Platform active. Note: this code is displayed only if the Movable
w
ft
CCO
n
Platform check function is enabled not programming at address 63 the value ‘+1’
.u
.c
li
w
.c
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
p-
w
p-
ft
PSM PSM input signal active. Up direction movement (in inspection mode) push-button pressed.
n
.u
.c
li
w
.u
PDM input signal active. Down direction movement (in inspection mode) push-button pressed.
.c
PDM
p-
ft
w
w
ft
.c
li
w
p-
CEP (FS3) signal active. Displayed only if the fire service mode or the firefighters service mode are
w
p-
ft
CEP
n
active
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
.u
Duplex System. Note: this code is displayed only if Duplex funcion is enabled (programming at address
.c
li
w
63 the value ‘+4’) and if the system is really communicating with the other system connected with the
p-
DUP
w
ft
w
.c
p-
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
ft
w
16
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
BVD Low Speed in Down direction
w
lif
.u
.c
AVD High Speed in Down direction
w
p-
t
lif
COL Collective Calls system.
w
.u
.c
p-
UNI Automatic Single Calls system
w
w
w
ft
n
‘Man Present’ Operation
w
UOM
.u
.c
-li
w
w
w
ft
w
-li
The priority of the code visualization follow the same order of the table above. The codes that fill the highest position of
w
.u
.c
w
the table have a priority higher than the ones that fill the lowest position in the same table. For example if both the CM
p
w
ft
n
n
.u
input signal and the PCP input signal are active, the code FCM will be displayed.
.c
-li
w
.c
ft
w
p
ft
n
3.2.3 Programming Mode
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
p
w
ft
n
In Programming Mode is possible to set up the control board with all the function needed from the system.
p
.u
.c
-li
w
.u
To enter in Programming Mode, the system must be stopped and the push-button of the keypad DISP900 (SPEEDY,
.c
ft
w
p
DATA, UP and DOWN) must be inactive.
w
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
The programming mode is activated moving the switch on the keypad in PROG position. In programming mode the
p
w
system remains blocked with the “reserved” signal on.
ft
p
.u
-li
w
.u
In programming mode, in the field of the display reserved to the input state code, will be visualized the string PAR
t.c
w
w
p
(PARAMETER) followed by the last address’ number checked in the last board programming. If, in the meantime, a
w
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
power outage had occurred will be displayed the number of the first address (00).
p
w
w
Now it is possible to reach the parameter that has to be visualized and setted using the UP and DOWN Push-buttons.
p
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
Pushing together UP or DOWN push-button and SPEEDY, the scrolling of the parameter list can be speeded up.
t.c
w
w
p
w
When the desired address is reached, it is possible to display the setted value pushing the DATA push-button: in the field
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
w
of the display reserved to the state code is visualized the string VAL (VALUE) and in the next numeric field is visualized
w
w
w
the value currently setted in the selected parameter. Thi value can be modified keeping pushed the DATA button and
p
f
n
-li
w
.u
pressing the UP or DOWN push button to select the new value. When the desired value had been reached, it is necessary
t.c
p
w
to release the DATA button, the selected value will blink three times and the new value will be memorized in memory.
n
f
n
.u
Keep one finger’s on DATO button to modify the value and press UP or DOWN button to select the new setting. When
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
w
the desired value is reached release the DATO button, if the memorization is correct the display will blink 3 times with
p
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
w
Whenever the new value is wrong, the last value stored will remain and it will be displayed the fault code ‘58’ (for
p
w
n
up
f
n
.u
functions) and code ‘59’ (for stops number < 2 or > 16).When modifying “Programmable Times”, if a value is out of
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
range, the default value (shown in the previous table) is set automatically.
p
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
At the end, exit from program mode, moving the switch on DISP900 in NORM position, the plant is operative with the
t.c
-li
p
w
f
n
.u
-li
w
Each control board is pre-programmed with default values (default configuration), shown on previous tables.
.u
t.c
t.
w
In the figure below is represented the state diagram of the programming procedure and some example display’s screens in
w
p
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
p
w
ft
w
MATrXXXX1011
p
New Value
n
.u
li
w
programmed in the
.u
Current
.c
Uni 0
p-
w
selected parameter.
w
Floor
w
ft
w
.u
MAN
w
ft
Switch = PROG
w
NORM accepted
n
.c
.
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
n
.u
Pressing Releasing
.c
w
p-
ft
DATA DATA
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
.u
.c
li
w
p-
Parameter
ft
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
p-
MATrXXXX1011
w
p-
ft
PAr 00
n
.u
.c
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
ft
programmed
w
PROG
ft
+ + mode
+ +
n
.u
SPEEDY
li
w
.u
.c
MATrXXXX1011
w
ft
desired value
.u
Uni 0
.c
li
w
value
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
17
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
3.2.4 Inspection Mode
w
lif
.u
.c
With the multifunction keypad DISP900 is possibile to manage the Inspection Mode. Ref Paragraph 9.6.
w
p-
t
To enter in Inspection Mode it is necessary to move the switch on DISP900 in MAN position. In Inspection Mode, in the
lif
n
w
.u
field of the display reserved to the state code is visualized the code ‘MAN’. Now using SPEEDY+UP and
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
n
SPEEDY+DOWN push buttons is possible to move the car respectively in up and in down direction.
w
.u
.c
-li
w
Pushing the SPEEDY+UP push button the car will move in up direction and in the field of the display reserved to the
w
w
ft
w
p
state code will be visualized the code PSM (Up Direction in Inspection Mode active).
-li
w
.u
.c
Pushing the SPEEDY+DOWN push button the car will move in up direction and in the field of the display reserved to the
p
w
ft
n
state code will be visualized the code PDM (Down Direction in Inspection Mode active).
n
.u
.c
-li
w
.c
ft
w
p
In the figure below is resumed the Inspection Mode management made through the DISP900 keypad and some example
ft
-li
w
.u
display’s screens in the differ Inspection Mode’s phases.
.c
-li
p
w
ft
n
p
.u
.c
-li
w
.u
.c
ft
w
p
w
ft
n
MATrXXXX1011
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
p
Uni 0
w
ft
Current Floor
p
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
n
Switch = MAN MAN MAN Switch = NORM
w
f
.u
NORM NORM
t.c
-li
w
p
w
w
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
n
+
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
w
Keep pressed
w
Keep pressed
w
SPEEDY+ UP
w
SPEEDY+ DOWN
f
n
Push-Button
-li
w
.u
Push-Button
t.c
p
w
n
f
n
.u
t.c
PDM 0 MAn 0 PSM 2
-li
w
t.c
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
n
up
Plant stopped in
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
active Push-Button Push-Button active
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
3.2.5 Alarm Mode
p
w
p
f
n
.u
-li
w
When a fault occurs, in the field of the display reserved to the state code will be visualized the string ‘ERR’ (ERROR)
.u
t.c
t.
w
w
p
w
f
and in the next number is show the error code. For a complete description of the Alarm Mode management and of alarm
n
-li
w
f
.u
p
w
ft
w
Pressing the DATA and SPEEDY push buttons simultaneously you can read a brief description of the meaning of the
p
.u
li
w
.u
fault. The description of the fault is on two pages that are rotated and the bottom of the second page shows a two-digit
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
number representing the time in hours elapsed since the previous failure.
n
w
.u
.c
In the figure below are shows some example display’s screen when an alarm occurs.
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
.
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
w
p-
ft
w
ift
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
p-
ft
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
p-
w
p-
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
w
p-
w
p-
ft
n
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
18
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
n
MATrXXXX1011
w
lif
.u
.c
w
Current
p-
Uni 0
t
Floor
lif
n
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
-li
w Occurrence SPEEDY + DATA
w
w
of an Alarm
ft
Visualization of Alarm Code
w
+ Alarm
n
and Alarm Description
-li
Code
w
.u
.c
p
w
ft
n
MATrXXXX1011 A81-alarm
n
.u
.c
-li
w
.c
description
w
err 81 00
ft
w
p
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
ERR = Error Releasing
p
w
ft
n
+
p
SPEEDY + DATA
n
.u
Time (hours)
.c
Alarm
-li
w
.u
.c
ft
w
p
w
ft
n
previous Alarm
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
p
Keep pressed
ft
p
SPEEDY for
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
3 seconds
w
w
p
w
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
MATrXXXX1011
p
w
w
f
uni 0
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
3.2.6 Input State Check
w
w
f
n
-li
w
.u
It is possibile to visualize on the display a state code with a short description of its meaning. This code shows if a
t.c
p
particular signal or function is active. Ref Paragraph 1.6.
w
n
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
To visualize the state code it is necessari to push, in Running Mode or in Inspection Mode, the DATA push button.
t.c
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
n
up
MATrXXXX1011
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
Uni 0
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
p
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
w
w
p
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
w
Release
p
Keep
w
ft
w
DATA
.u
Pressed
li
w
.u
.c
Push-button
p-
DATA
w
w
w
ft
Push-button
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
S41-ALT Pressed
.c
.
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
w
p-
ft
w
ift
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
p-
ft
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
p-
w
p-
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
w
p-
w
p-
ft
n
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
19
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
3.3PROGRAMMING WRITING PROTECTION
w
lif
.u
.c
w
THROUGH PASSWORD
p-
t
lif
n
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
-li
w
w
It’s possibile to set up a password through a supervision software, which enables to protect programming parameters
ft
w
-li
from writing.In order to be input through a push-button of the keypad DISP900, the password must only have numbers,
w
.u
.c
w
otherwise it is possible to unlock it by supervision software.
p
w
ft
n
n
.u
In order to block all programming parameters, you must set a password made up of 5 figures (ex.0123) through the
.c
-li
w
.c
supervision software.
ft
w
p
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
Once the password is set, it is possible to input it through push-button of the keypad DISP900 in the proper parameters
p
w
ft
n
p
.u
(ind. 47-48-49).
.c
-li
w
.u
.c
ft
w
p
w
ft
n
For instance, if the previus password corresponds to 0123, you must program index 49 to “01” and index 48 to “23”.
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
p
.u
4 FIGURES PASSWORD
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
BLOCK ALL PARAMETERS 47-48-49
w
p
w
w
f
INDEX 49 48 47
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
VALUE 01 23 45
p
w
w
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
Everytime you go back to programming, the password will be required.
w
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
By setting a password made up of 6 figures it is possible ti protect only those parameters related to the counting of the
w
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
.u
If you wont blocking only index 47,48 and 49 ,you must set a password by supervision software (ex 012345).
t.c
p
To unlock these index by push-button of the keypad DISP900 you must set up the access code in the proper parameters.
w
n
f
n
.u
For instance if the previus password corrisponds to 012345, you must program index 49 to “01, index 48 to “23” and
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
index 47 to “45”.
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
6 FIGURES PASSWORD
t.c
-li
p
w
n
up
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
INDEX 49 48 47
t.c
w
w
VALUE 01 23 45
p
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
f
n
.u
-li
w
Setting a blank space “ ” as a new password by supervision software, the password is deactivated.
.u
t.c
t.
w
w
p
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
PASSWORD DESCRIPTION
w
p
w
ft
“ ” BLANK SPACE
w
PASSWORD DEACTIVATED
p
.u
li
w
.u
Numeric (4 figures) Block all parameters, it is possibile unlock from the push button of the keypad DISP900.
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
Numeric (6 figures) Block some parameters, it is possibile unlock from the push button of the keypad DISP900.
n
w
.u
.c
li
w
“0000” or “000000” Block only the supervision, it is unlock from the control board.
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
.
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
w
p-
ft
w
ift
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
p-
ft
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
p-
w
p-
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
w
p-
w
p-
ft
n
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
20
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
3.4PROGRAMMING BY PC
w
lif
.u
.c
w
For programming the memory, in alternative to procedure described at the paragraph 3.2.3, it’s possible use a Personal
p-
t
lif
n
Computer, with the proper supervision software. It’s can also monotoring all Inputs and outputs of the control board.
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
-li
w PC
w
w
ft
w
-li
w
.u
.c
COMMUNICATION
p
w
ft
n
CHANNELS
n
.u
.c
-li
w
.c
Control board
ft
w
p
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
p
w
ft
n
p
.u
.c
-li
w
.u
.c
ft
w
p
w
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
p
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
n
This system is capable of performing the following steps:
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
p
w
w
Reading and programming the memory of the control panel (Times, Functions and Parameters);
p
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
Reading and programming the memory of the control panel (Times, Functions and Parameters);
t.c
w
w
Consultation of the last 32 faults reported by the control board;
p
w
w
f
cn
.u
Removal of the faults reported in the control board;
t.c
-li
w
w
Real-time visualization of the state of all inputs and outputs;
w
w
f
n
-li
w
.u
t.c
p
w
n
Implementation of the 'manual release' plant in case of permanent damage (after resolving the cause of the
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
blockage)
t.c
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
The control board is able to handle different types of connection to the PC and then different types of
w
p
w
communication channels:
n
up
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
Local connection: in this case you will not need to use any modem but the connection between the control board
w
f
n
-li
w
f
and the PC can be done with a special 3-wire cable that connects to a PC COM port with 9-pin connector on the
.u
t.c
-li
w
card control. Code: CB_VG0056_01 (2mt.)
p
w
p
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
Board
w
PC
w
p
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
w
DB9-F
DB9-F
p
w
ft
w
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
Pin-out
w
ft
w
li
w
CN2-3
.u
CN1-2
.c
.
p-
w
w
CN1-3 CN2-2
w
ft
w
n
.u
CN1-5 CN2-5
.c
li
w
.c
w
p-
ft
w
ift
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
Connection via GSM modem: if the remote connection, if you do not have access to a telephone line you can
n
.u
.c
li
w
use a GSM modem connected to the 9-pin connector on the control card via cable. (See brochure supervision)
.c
p-
ft
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
p-
w
p-
ft
For more information you can see the user manual of supervision software.
n
.u
.c
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
w
Note:
p-
w
p-
ft
If you use the monitoring software for the PC to the previous version V.4.3.0, set +16 at
n
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
21
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
4.
w
w
w
lif
.u
.c
CONTROL BOARD
w
p-
t
lif
n
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
n
CHARACTERISTICS
w
.u
.c
-li
w
w
w
ft
w
-li
w
.u
.c
w
4.1 GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
p
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
-li
w
.c
ft
w
p
ft
-li
w
.u
Dimensions: 150 x 255 mm
.c
-li
w
p
Weigh: 400 g.
ft
n
p
.u
Control board’s software: SW is contained into a removable and reprogrammable microprocessor with FLASH
.c
-li
w
.u
.c
ft
w
technology.
p
w
ft
-li
w
Setting plant’s parameters and faults list: board totally programmable by a removable display (DISP900) or via
.u
.c
-li
w
p
Computer both in local or remote mode (with a modem board). Parameters are stored thanks to EEPROM and so the
ft
p
.u
control board doesn’t lose its programming even when there is a power off.
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
Compliance with safety’s circuits rules: the board is compliance with UNI EN 81-1/2 Standard currently in force.
w
p
w
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
p
w
w
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
4.2.1 Power Supplies
w
p
w
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
w
w
Power supply: Provide a continuous voltage at connectors GND and CL obtained rectifying an alternate voltage in
p
f
n
-li
w
.u
p
w
n
f
Power supply with battery: at the connector BAT has to be connected at the battery of 12V to keep enable the
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
alarm and emergency’s functions even if power supply turn off. Ref. Paragraph 6.3
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
Output power supply for subordinate boards and emergency devices: from connector VIM which supplys a
-li
p
w
n
voltage of 13.5 Vdc stablized and backed up with battery and a maximum current of 2A.
up
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
f
n
GND is the zero reference for the board and the other external devices (lights, relais, subordinate
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
p
f
n
OM is the zero reference for the working voltage and safety circuits;
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
AL- is the zero reference for alarm circuit. After insulation tests, these connectors are to be connected
w
w
p
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
w
.u
li
w
.u
.c
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
4.2.2 Inputs
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
All inputs, except that’s for checking on safety’s chains (optoisolated), must be connected towards the GND. They are
.u
.c
.
p-
w
w
not damaged by voltages less than 24V. All inputs have LED signalling.
w
ft
w
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
w
p-
ft
4.2.3 Outputs
w
ift
li
w
.u
.c
p-
All transistor outputs close towards GND devices connected at 12 or 24 Vdc. The outputs take a maximum current of
w
w
ft
.u
.c
li
w
.c
The outputs for run contactors, for doors relays, for the OCC and the CE signals are relays contact which can take 5A
p-
ft
w
ft
max.
li
w
.u
.c
li
p-
w
p-
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
w
p-
w
p-
ft
n
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
22
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
4.3 ELECTRICAL DRAWING
w
lif
.u
.c
w
p-
t
lif
n
w
from 24V to 110V AC or DC
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
n
OM VM
w
.u
.c
-li
w
Serial Expansion
w
PTC EXC
ft
VIM
w
boards
n
14Vac ± Power supply CRP
-li
w
Interna
.u
10%
.c
l + 12V
w
¸ CL
p
w
14Vdc
ft
n
24Vac ± Regulator
n
.u
Safety chain
.c
-li
10% w
.c
Battery
ft
w
RAP
p
ft
Charg
n
Test AP
-li
w
2
.u
TST er
.c
2
-li
p
w
ft
n
P RAP
p
GND
n
.u
.c
-li
w
.u
- + C (CP/PATT)
.c
ft
w
P RCP
p
12V
w
ft
BAT
n
KBAT
-li
w
.u
EXC
.c
-li
w
RD
p
w
ft
External
RS
p
.u
door’s closing
-li
Main magnetic w ALT
.u
IF contacts
t.c
sensors DISP90
w
RAC*
w
p
0
w
ICV
n
CS
w
f
.u
CC
t.c
-li
w
w
Movable Safety
p
CC OM
w
Car Door
w
By-Pass
p
Platform
f
C
n
MAN
.u
circuit
-li
w
NORM CT
.u
CCS
t.c
w
Blocks
w
pushbutton PAP
p
TG
w
n
Door close TG TP
w
f
cn
.u
pushbutton PCP
t.c
-li
w
w
w
CM1
w
P TP
p
Photocell
f
n
TG
-li
s CM2 w NOTE:
.u
t.c
p
w
n
S TS landing and automatic
expansion board
f
n
.u
EM doors in the car.
t.c
-li
w
(Optional)
t.c
w
TSD
w
TD
w
TD
f
Contactors
n
CPP
-li
w
f
Check
.u
t.c
-li
APG
w
p
w
n
GND
up
+12V o +24V
f
MAN
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
M (up to 3KV) C
w
f
n
PDM
-li
w
f
0
.u
p
w
p
.u
7
-li
w
Relevelling Zone
.u
t.c
APA
t.
Protections check/
w
w
f
Timer1
n
CS1 8
-li
w
f
.u
AR ...
indication on the
w
Control
p
w
Alarm Reset
ft
w
.u
Oil Temp.
li
w
.u
TO
.c
p-
16
Board w
w
ft
23 w
.u
.c
li
w
w
FS
p-
AUX1/DATO
w
ft
w
FD
n
protected from
.c
.
AUX3/ SA
p-
w
w
ft
SAR
Imax = 0.5A w
n
.u
A
.c
li
w
AL+
.c
6V o 12V
w
p-
B
w
ft
Alarm
w
ift
.c
D
p-
w
Floors’ Serial RU
ft
Timer 1
n
.u
p-
GND
ft
3
w
boards Gon
ft
GN
n
li
w
.c
SNR
li
Overload Alarm
p-
RST AP
w
ft
Car’s Serial
n
Err 2
t y
n
.u
.c
p-
Reset
ft
PC Connection
w
Signalling
w
ft
Pushbutton
li
w
Leds
.u
.c
li
w
p-
w
p-
ft
n
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
23
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
5.
w
w
w
lif
.u
.c
WIRINGS DESCRIPTION
w
p-
t
lif
n
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
5.10 – 23
.c
-li
w
w
w
ft
w
-li
w
Programmable Inputs/Outputs (multiplexed). Ref paragraph 2.5.
.u
.c
5.2A/B/C/D
p
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
-li
w
.c
Outputs for binary coded position/binary inverted code/Gray code. Vedere paragrafo 8.1.
ft
w
p
ft
n
5.3AL-/ AL+/ AR/ RES/ SA/ SAR
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
p
w
ft
n
p
Alarm wiring:
n
.u
.c
-li
w
.u
.c
ft
w
p
w
ft
n
AL- : input for alarm push button;
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
p
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
n
SA: input to signal SENT ALARM through a blinking light
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
SAR:
p
w
w
f
-input to signal aknowledged alarm through a fixed light:
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
-is used for the signal of out of service. It’s active when the plant is in block, in maintainance and in programming.
w
w
p
w
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
w
NOTE if at address 49 is programmed a value > 90, SAR output is activated when expires the time for the six-monthly
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
.u
t.c
5.4 ALT
w
p
w
n
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
t.c
-li
p
w
n
up
car stops, calls and reservations are cancelled(internal and landing ones);
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
f
n
relevelling is disabled;
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
f
n
.u
-li
w
t.c
t.
w
w
if car isn’t next to door opening zone, car will keep up doors closed;
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
This signal may be used to control semiautomatic doors’ approach in hydraulic plant instead of PAP signal.
w
.u
li
w
5.5 AP/CP/CRP
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
w
p-
ft
w
n
AP: output for doors opening ( only for first entrance in the case of multi-entrances plants);
li
w
.u
.c
.
p-
w
CP: output for doors closing ;
w
w
ft
CRP: doors’relays common input; it can be wired after ALT signal or before the safety circuit w
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
w
p-
ft
w
However, door closing control and beginning door opening are activated only if ALT signal is active.
ift
li
w
5.6 AP2
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
Output signals for the opening of second entrances in multi-access plant. Ref. Paragraph 6.13.6.
li
w
.c
p-
If the second access is not enabled (programming ‘1’ or ‘3’ at address 0) AP2 output is active when the inspection mode
ft
w
ft
li
w
is active.
.u
.c
li
p-
w
If there isn’t the second entrance (programming ‘1’ or ‘3’ at address 0), in hydraulic plant, with “man-present” mode
p-
ft
n
n
.u
.c
enabled, the A2 output is activated to enable landing calls, that is when car is not occupied or a landing call is active. For
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
example, wiring this output (AP2) to INT input signal, this functionality could be used in order to obtain car calls in
w
ft
li
w
.c
li
w
p-
w
5.7 APA
p-
ft
n
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
.u
.c
w
p-
ft
li
w
.c
p-
w
w
ft
programming at address 62, the value ‘+8’ which enables this input signal control (only with DA-DB magnetic sensors).
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
24
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
In order to enable pre-opening door, it is necessary to program parameter at address 19 with a values >= ’70’ and at add.
w
lif
.u
62 with a ‘+16’ (now it is possible only in hydraulic plant).
.c
w
p-
IF ICV APA
t
IF ICV
lif
n
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
-li
w
w
w
ft
w
-li
w
.u
STOP ZONE Slowing down zone
.c
Re-levelling zone
p
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
-li
w
.c
ft
w
p
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
p
w
ft
n
p
.u
.c
-li
IF/ICV w DA/DB
.u
.c
w
layout
ft
layout
w
p
w
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
p
.u
5.8APG
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
n
Input signal controls high speed’s contactor (TG) and door opening relay (AP).
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
p
w
w
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
When car runs at slow speed, otherwise the elevator is stopped, and fault ‘64’ is signalled.
t.c
w
w
p
When car is stopped, otherwise fault ‘44’ is signalled.
w
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
It has to be opened:
w
w
f
n
When car runs at high speed, that is when control board activates TG signal, otherwise lift is stopped signalling fault
-li
w
.u
t.c
‘65’.
w
p
w
n
When control board commands door opening otherwise fault ‘55’ is signalled.
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
5.9AUX1/AUX2/AUX3
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
Reserved inputs.
w
p
w
n
5.10 BAT
up
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
f
It is the input to connect a 12V battery to keep enable the alarm and emergency’s functions even if power supply
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
w
w
p
w
f
Inputs for the checking movable platform: busy car contact (CCO), car full load contact (CCC) and car overload contact
n
-li
w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
(CCS).
w
p
w
ft
w
CCS input is activated when this contact is opened if a ‘+32’ is programmed at address 62. Ref. Paragraph 7.5
p
.u
li
w
.u
CCS signal with MAN signal, is employed to activate “manual rescue operation”, Ref. Paragraph 9.6.1
.c
p-
w
w
5.12 CL
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
Is the input for the positive pole of the power supply voltage of the control board. Ref. Paragraph 4.2.
n
li
w
.c
.
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
n
.u
.c
w
p-
ft
w
DIN/KI: data and clock for car serial board expansion communication (SERCAR, VEG0400, SERCAR_LCD…).
ift
li
w
.u
.c
DEX/KE: data and clock for landing serial board expansion communication (FLOORDIS, VEG0400, VEG0700,
p-
w
w
ft
VEG800...)
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
p-
ft
w
Ref. Chapter 10
ft
li
w
5.14 CM1/CM2
.u
.c
li
p-
w
p-
ft
n
n
.u
Door Photodetector input signals for each entrance (entrance 1,and 2); Ref. paragraph 6.7
.c
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
w
ft
li
w
5.14.1 CM1
.u
.c
li
w
p-
w
p-
ft
If the plant has manual doors and it is in ‘man-present’ mode CM1 signal works as the ALT signal:
n
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
.c
li
w
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
To have the same kind of working in single call mode too, you have to program the “Man Present Mode” instead of the
w
w
ft
“Single Call Mode” and connect the INT input to GND. Ref. paragraph 5.27.
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
25
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
5.15 CPF
w
lif
.u
.c
w
p-
w
Multifunctional output:
t
lif
n
w
.u
TMR3
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
n
CPF may be an output signal of a general purpose timer (TMR3, add.29), together with FS3 input signal. This timer
w
.u
.c
-li
w
(CHF add. 29) may be set to a value between ‘0’ and ‘95’ tenth of second.
w
w
ft
w
-li
w
.u
High speed
.c
p
w
ft
Programming a value >= ’97’ at address 29 (CHF parameter), the CPF output signal drive the high speed (V2P).
n
n
.u
.c
-li
w
High speed is the velocity of a run through 2 or more floors. This signal is activated when distance is higher then an
.c
ft
w
p
ft
interfloor distance and the elevator is not in synchronizing or inspection mode. For the slowing down action refer to
-li
w
.u
.c
‘programmable times’ table.
-li
p
w
ft
n
Firefighters service mode
p
.u
.c
-li
w
Programming the CHF time (add. 29) at a value= ‘96’, the CPF output is used to enable forced closing and ringing.
.u
.c
ft
w
p
w
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
Signal of out of service
-li
w
p
w
ft
Programming the CHF time (add.29) at a value=’95’, the CPF output is used for the signal of out of service.It’s active
p
.u
-li
w
.u
w
w
p
w
w
f
.u
t.c
5.16 CPP
-li
w
p
w
w
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
It is an input signal that controls slow speed contactor (TP) and door closing relay (CP).
t.c
w
w
p
w
w
It must be closed to GND:
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
w
when there isn’t door closing command, otherwise fault ‘46’ is signalled.
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
.u
It has to be opened:
t.c
w
when car runs at slow speed, that is when lift control board activates TP signal, otherwise the elevator blocks with
p
w
n
f
n
.u
fault ‘53’;
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
during door closing operation and when there is no sighnal on CS input, otherwise fault ‘54’ is generated. This type
w
f
n
-li
w
f
of control can be deactivated programming ‘0’ or ‘32’ at address 10, and, in this case, it is not necessary to connect a
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
n
up
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
In Hydraulic plant if TST (add. 25) is programmed with an odd value < 70 CPP input is checked before the activation of
p
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
TS contactor.
t.c
-li
w
5.17 CS
p
w
p
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
w
This signal has to be wired after door’s contacts. When manoeuvre voltage is present, doors are certainly closed and so
w
p
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
p
If this connector keep opened for a time longer than the non-starting time (TMP, add. 21) since the door closing started,
w
ft
w
.u
li
w
.c
p-
w
w
w
w
.u
.c
li
w
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
.
p-
w
w
This procedure is followed also when car stop out of landing, with exception of door opening.
w
ft
.u
.c
li
w
.c
w
p-
5.18 CS1
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
Multifunctional input:
.u
.c
li
w
.c
p-
ft
w
TMR1
ft
li
w
.u
.c
CS1 may be an input signal of a general purpose timer (TMR1), together with RU output signal. This timer may be
li
p-
w
p-
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.u
.c
ft
w
w
ft
CS1 can be input for safety circuit’s control not programming ‘+4’ at address ‘62’ (in this way the general purpose
li
w
.u
.c
li
w
p-
w
timer TMR1 is not available). When this control is activated and CS1 is opened, relevelling is disabled. Ref.
p-
ft
n
.u
paragraph 7.1
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
w
.u
In rope plant, if TMR1 (address 31) is set to the value ‘99’, the unlocking brake’s check is enabled. In fact CS1 is
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
During halt operation, contactors go off after a programmable time at address 26 (TRIF) from CS1 opening.
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
26
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
5.19 CT
w
lif
.u
.c
w
Contactors’ common (D, S, P, G). Must be wired to the safety chain end. If it keep opened, TS and TD contactors cannot
p-
t
lif
n
w
be activated.
.u
.c
p-
w
5.20 EM
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
-li
w
w
Input for emergency service activation, that is when there is a power cut.
ft
w
n
In Normal mode EM input must be closed to prevent plant blocking with fault ‘81’. Ref. paragraph 9.2
-li
w
.u
.c
5.21 EXC
p
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
-li
w
.c
Overrun control input. Must be wired at the beginning of safety chain, preceded only by overrun sensors.
ft
w
p
ft
n
If this contact opens, plant blocks permanently with fault ‘81’ only if emergency or inspection services are not active.
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
p
w
ft
n
p
.u
.c
If immediate blocking is programmed (‘4’ or ‘12’ at add. 5): plant blocks promptly with fault ‘81’ and car keeps
-li
w
.u
.c
ft
w
stopped even if EXC contact closes in the meantime.
p
w
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
If blocking after the automatic landing 0 reaching is programmed (‘0’ and or ‘8’ at add. 5):
p
w
ft
p
Hydraulic plant: if the car halts at landing different from floor 0, If runs to reach landing 0 (if EXC closes in
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
n
Traction/rope plant: the system is blocked immediately with fault ‘81’ and the car keeps blocked until EXC
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
p
w
w
5.22 FD/FS
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
n
Outputs that command the signalling of up/down run direction or next run direction (up/down arrows).
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
w
5.23 FS3
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
.u
t.c
Multifunctional input:
w
p
w
n
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
TMR3
t.c
w
w
w
FS3 may be the input signal of a general purpose timer together with CPF output signal. This timer (CHF add.29)
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
may be set to a value between ‘0’ and ‘95’ tenth of second. Ref. paragraph 6.15
t.c
-li
p
w
n
up
Firefighters service mode (EN81 – 72 – July 2003) only for firefighters lifts
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
f
n
-li
Forced closing and alarm horn are activated on CPF output. w
f
.u
t.c
-li
FS3 is used like Phase 1 (Ref. paragraph 9.8.2) activation command: ‘priority recall for the firefighters lift’.
w
p
w
p
FS3 + INT are used like Phase 2 (Ref. paragraph 9.8.2) activation commands: ‘use of the lift under
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
firefighters control’.
w
w
p
w
f
n
-li
Check of the second key in car with CM3 (INT). w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
.u
li
w
Setting CHF (address 29) at the ‘97’ or ‘98’ value, FS3 is set like input to allow FIRE SERVICE MODE. When
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
the signal is activated, the current active call is completed, then all reservations are cancelled and a call to the NPM
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
.
p-
w
Contact wired to FS3 connector has to change at least one time during a complete run from the lower (RD sensor) to
w
w
ft
the upper (RS sensor) landing. In order to activate the switching control, it is necessary program the CHF time (addr w
n
.u
.c
li
w
29) at the ‘99’ value. If the switching not occurs fault ‘57’ is generated. This fault is excluded in emergency mode or
.c
w
p-
ft
w
ift
.c
p-
w
w
ft
5.24 GND
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
p-
ft
w
ft
This input is the reference electric potential (Zero voltage) for the power supply and for the signalling lights. It is
li
w
.u
.c
li
p-
ft
5.25 GN
n
.u
.c
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
5.26 ICV/IF
li
w
p-
w
p-
ft
n
.u
li
w
.u
p-
w
w
They are active when they are opened or closed in function of parameter’s value at address 15 (‘0’ - opened at landing,
w
ft
w
.u
‘64’- closed at landing). At address 14 can be selected the placement layout (DA/DB or IF/ICV) of the magnetic sensors
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
(value ‘0’ or ‘16’ for DA/DB layout, value ‘32’ or ‘48’ for IF/ICV). Ref. paragraph 6.5
w
li
w
.u
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
27
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
IF ICV DA DB
w
lif
.u
.c
w
p-
t
lif
n
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
STOPPING RELEVELLING SLOWING DOWN
.u
.c
-li
w Zone Zone Zone
w
w
ft
w
-li
w
.u
.c
p
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
-li
w
.c
ft
w
p
ft
n
IF/ICV DA/DB
-li
w
.u
layout layout
.c
-li
5.27 INT
p
w
ft
n
p
.u
.c
-li
w
.u
Input for the control of “Jnternal mode” (ref paragraph 9.4) or for the safety reopening systems/photodetector of the third
.c
ft
w
p
w
ft
n
entrance (if the third entrance is enabled programming address 3 with value 64). Ref paragraph 6.7.
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
If the third entrance is disable ( programming ‘0’ at address 3), INT signal enables different functions depending from the
p
.u
-li
w
.u
type of connection and the programming of the “Man Present” mode (address 63):
t.c
w
w
p
w
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
If INT is always closed to GND: car and landing calls are managed like single call plant’s ones.
p
w
w
f
n
.u
If INT is closed to GND when car is not busy: car calls are served like “man-present” service’s ones and
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
landing calls are served like single call plant’s ones. In order INT input is closed to GND when car is not
w
p
w
w
f
cn
.u
reserved, it is possible to wire this connector to:
t.c
-li
w
w
A presence in car sensor (car busy sensor);
w
w
f
n
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
AP2 output, that, in this condition, is active (closed to GND) when plant is not reserved or when a landing
p
w
n
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
call is active.
t.c
w
w
If INT is always opened: car and landing calls are managed like “man-present” service’s one.
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
If “Man Present” service is not enabled and the third access is not enabled too, INT is the “Internal Mode” activation
w
p
w
n
up
input. INT activation deletes landing calls, keeps car busy with open door and only one internal call at time is served.
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
5.28 MAN
t.c
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
Input for the Inspection mode activation. Normally the Inspection mode is enabled closing this input to GND but it is
w
p
w
programmable active opened (normally closed) setting value ‘+1’ at address 62. Ref. paragraph 9.6
p
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
5.29 OCC
t.c
t.
w
w
p
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
.c
Output for the ‘reserved’ car signalling’s lights (used in single call systems only). Ref. paragraph 8.5
-li
w
p
w
ft
5.30 OM
w
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
Zero voltage (reference voltage) of car manoeuvre voltage. Ref paragraph 4.2.1
ft
w
.u
5.31 PAP
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
Door opening or call cancellation push button input signal. Door opening is enabled if the car is still in the door zone and
.u
.c
.
p-
w
w
if run has not yet begun. It is enabled in Inspection mode too if CS contact is opened.
w
ft
w
n
.u
.c
In hydraulic plant with semiautomatic doors, in order to guarantee car relevelling, use PAP connector to check the
li
w
.c
w
p-
ft
external doors closing contact instead of ALT connector (wiring is shown in the picture).
w
ift
li
w
If the door closing relay RAcc is deactivated, PAP contact is closed and door are kept opened, otherwise PAP is opened.
.u
.c
p-
w
For PAP input there are two distinct rebound times: the rebound time for the activation of the input and the rebound time
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
for the deactivation of the input. The activaqtion rebound time is programmable at address 46 (LETT parameter). The
li
w
.c
p-
ft
deactivation rebound time has a fixed value of 1 second. This function is useful when the PAP input is used to monitor
w
ft
li
w
.c
li
p-
w
p-
In collective calls systems, if this input remains active for a time longer than 3 seconds, all car reservations are cancelled.
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
w
p-
w
p-
ft
n
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
Car
w
ft
Extern doors
n
Doors Blocks
.u
Closing Contacts
.c
li
w
Contacts
w
p-
PAP
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
RAcc
p-
RAcc
w
w
ft
ALT CS
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
28
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
5.32 PAT
w
lif
.u
.c
w
p-
w
It is the output signal for the retiring cam. This input is active at the run beginning (for call or Inspection starting). It
t
lif
n
w
enables the locks of external door, even if the car door is still opened. This output is deactivated in stopping zone.
.u
.c
p-
w
5.33 PCP
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
-li
w
w
Input for the door closing push button. When Pressing this button (or any other car call button) the waiting time with door
ft
w
-li
opened is resetted, doors close immediately and car starts.
w
.u
.c
w
Programming an odd value at the add. 30 (RIP), PCP can be used even like SAP function (opening exclusion to test the
p
w
ft
n
n
.u
system). Ref. paragraph 6.12.2
.c
-li
w
.c
In the follow situations PCP input is able to activate FIRE SERVICE MODE:
ft
w
p
ft
-li
w
.u
The Fire Service Mode is activated (that is at add. 39 (NPM) is programmed a value < ‘32’).
.c
-li
p
w
ft
n
Is not used the FS3 input to activate this operation (fire service mode).
p
.u
.c
-li
w
5.34 PDM/PSM
.u
.c
ft
w
p
w
ft
-li
w
.u
Input signals for up and down direction push button (in Inspection Mode), placed above the car. Ref. paragraph 9.6
.c
-li
w
p
5.35 RD/RS
w
ft
p
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
Input signals for lower and upper landing syncronising sensors. They are active when they are OPENED.
p
w
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
Placed only at extreme floors and some centimeters after the ICV sensors (that marks the slowing down zone).
p
w
w
f
n
.u
-li
w
RD sensor must to be placed at the lowest landing and RS at the highest one.
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
fault ‘41’: if both sensors are opened. This check is done at all times and in any car position.
w
w
f
n
fault ‘54’: if car reaches the upper landing and RS is closed, lift ends the stopping and it will automatic go to the
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
lower floor. the next time the car reaches the upper landing, if RS sensor is still closed, the system is blocked .
p
w
n
f
fault ‘55’: when occurs the same situation of fault ‘54’ but referred to the RD sensor. This means that RD sensor is
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
always closed and car reaches lower landing.
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
These sensors are also used for the run direction checking. Ref. paragraph 7.4
w
p
w
n
5.36 RU
up
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
TMR1
w
p
w
p
f
n
.u
RU may work as output signal for TMR1 (at add. 31), together with CS1 input signal. This timer (L13 add. 31) may
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
be set to a value between ‘0’ and ‘95’ tenth of second. Ref. paragraph 6.15.
w
w
p
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
p
w
ft
With DA/DB magnetic sensors’ layout, RU is used as relevelling enable command, programming L13 Timer at
w
.u
li
w
.c
p-
w
w
Programming the value ‘97’ at address 31, the RU output reports the presence of the IF signal or ICV signal. This
w
ft
w
.u
function can be used to activate one of the safety circuit’s channel that enables the relevelling operation in the door’s
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
.
p-
w
w
w
ft
Both in hydraulic and rope systems the RU output can be used to activate the safety circuit. Programming the value w
n
.u
.c
li
w
‘98’ at address 31 The RU output is activated in the door’s opening zone if the input APA is active (adding ‘+8’ at
.c
w
p-
ft
w
ift
address 62), otherwise is actifìvated when the stop zone is reached. Can be enabled the check of the safety circuit on
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
n
n
.u
p-
ft
RU is used as inverter speed benchmark’s activation command, programming L13 timer (add. 31) at the value ‘99’.
w
ft
li
w
.u
This output is activated at the starting after break opening (checked by CS1 input) and is deactivated promptly when
.c
li
p-
w
p-
ft
the car enters in stop zone. Motor contactors deactivation is delayed of TRIF time after CS1 input deactivation. Ref.
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
paragraph 6.17
.u
.c
p-
ft
5.37 SCP
w
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
w
p-
w
Output signals for the “Car at Floor Signalling” or for the opening signal of the third entrances in multi-access plant. Ref.
p-
ft
n
.u
li
w
Paragraph 6.12.6.
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
If there isn’t the third entrance, programming ‘0’ at the address ‘3’, SCP output does the car at landing signalling both
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
in rope and in hydraulic plant and even with ‘Man Present’ mode enabled, This output is activated at every floors in
w
p-
ft
w
the stop zone indipendently from floors count inputs’ setting, from wiring kind (parallel or serial) and from stop delay
n
li
w
.u
.c
(TRIF) value. In rope plant can be used as inverter stop control but PAY ATTENTION to enable the signal only at
p-
w
w
ft
arrival landing.
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
29
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
In the event that the number of floor (ind. 32) is> 16 the output “SCP” is used for binary code.
w
lif
.u
.c
w
p-
5.38 SNR
t
lif
n
w
.u
.c
p-
w
Alarm sound’s output signal. SNR is activated in these three situations:
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
-li
w
when car is overloaded (CCS is active) for 2 seconds;
w
w
ft
w
at the end of emergency service mode (when car is stopped and reserved in door opening zone and ALT signal is
-li
w
.u
.c
active with maintenance service mode deactivated);
p
w
ft
impulsive sound when a car call button is pressed (“Beep” if ‘2’ or ‘3’ is programmed at address 0).
n
n
.u
.c
-li
w
5.39 TD/TS
.c
ft
w
p
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
Output signals that command down direction (TD) and up direction (TS) run contactors.
p
w
5.40 TG
ft
n
p
.u
.c
-li
w
.u
.c
ft
w
High speed output signal (TG relay).
p
w
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
5.40.1 TG Delay
p
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
In hydraulic systems is possible to have a delay time of high speed introduction. This delay time is programmable in tenth
w
w
p
w
n
of seconds at the address 25 (TST). It is necessary programming a value between ‘70’ and ‘99’ and the delay value is
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
obtained subtracting to that value ‘70’ (delay = TST – 70) tenth of seconds).
p
w
w
E.g. program TST = 83 for a 13 tenth of seconds ‘ delay (83 – 70 = 13 tenth of seconds).
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
n
5.41 TM
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
w
w
f
Input signal of thermistor that measures temperature engine. Ref. paragraph 7.6
n
-li
w
.u
5.42 TO
t.c
p
w
n
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
If analogic value in input is higher than wanted limit (resistance thermometry > 4K Ω), with ‘70’ fault. Unlocking
t.c
-li
p
w
n
up
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
5.43 TP
p
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
The TP output has many actions depending on the value programmed at address 25 (TST) and on the system type.
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
w
.u
li
w
.u
p-
w
w
ft
w
.u
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
.
p-
w
w
w
5.43.1 TP Delay
ft
w
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
w
In Rope Systems it is possibile to delay the deactivation of the TP relay compared to the activation of TS and TD relays.
p-
ft
w
ift
This delay time (tenths of a second) is programmable at address 25 (TST). It is necessary programming a value between
li
w
.u
.c
p-
‘70’ and ‘99’ and the delay value is obtained subtracting to that value ‘70’ (delay = (TST – 70) tenth of seconds). E.g.
w
w
ft
.u
.c
li
w
.c
This feature can be used to manage the soft stop on the inverter by connecting TP on contactors and TS and TD on the
p-
ft
w
ft
commands for the inverter. With this type of operation you can perform a soft stop outside the plan too (useful for soft
li
w
.u
.c
li
p-
stop on electric platform lifts with ‘Man Present’ Mode or for soft stop in Inspection Mode.
w
p-
ft
.u
.c
li
w
.u
.c
5.44 TSD
p-
ft
w
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
w
It is the input for the check of up and down direction run’s contactors.
p-
w
p-
ft
n
.u
li
w
.u
It has to be closed to GND when system is idle, otherwise fault ‘47’ is signalled.
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
It has to be open when lift is moving. If this contact doesn’t open when control board activate TS or TD, are
w
p-
ft
w
generated fault ‘52’ for TS and fault ‘51’ for TD, call is cancelled and system keeps reserved. That happens also if
n
li
w
.u
.c
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
30
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
5.45 VIM
w
lif
.u
.c
w
p-
w
This output supplies a 13,5Vdc voltage backed up with battery that can be used to power other external boards which
t
lif
n
w
have to be powered from battery in absence of main power supply (max 1A) .
.u
.c
p-
w
5.46 LED SIGNALLING
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
-li
w
w
All the most important inputs have a led that indicates if the corresponding I/O is active (LED light ON) or inactive (LED
ft
w
-li
light OFF).
w
.u
.c
w
There are also four LEDS that signal some particular states of the control board:
p
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
-li
Led ‘PWR’. w
.c
ft
w
Led ‘Fault’
p
ft
-li
w
.u
Led ‘Err’
.c
-li
p
w
Led ‘Ready’
ft
n
p
.u
.c
-li
w
.u
.c
ft
w
p
w
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
5.46.1
-li
Led PWR
w
p
w
ft
p
.u
It is a GREEN LED that signals the presence of power supply on the control board. It lights up when the control board
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
5.46.2 Led Fault
p
w
w
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
It is a RED LED that signals the presence of a fault condition that blocks the system. It remains on until there is a fault
t.c
w
w
p
condition.
w
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
.u
t.c
It is a YELLOW LED that indicates if there are faults memorized in the fault record. In normal conditions the led is off
w
p
w
n
and it lights up when there are faults in memory. The yellow LED flashing indicates the presence of a fault stored in the
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
memory that has not been read yet.
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
n
up
f
n
.u
It is a GREEN LED that indicates the state of the control board’s microprocessor. It lights up when the microprocessor
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
has finished the start-up phase and is ready. The start-up phase is four seconds long but this time can be extended to ten
p
f
n
-li
w
f
t.c
-li
p
w
p
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
w
w
p
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
w
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
.
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
w
p-
ft
w
ift
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
p-
ft
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
p-
w
p-
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
w
p-
w
p-
ft
n
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
31
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
6.
w
w
w
lif
.u
.c
ARCHITECT SYSTEM’S
w
p-
t
lif
n
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
n
SPECIFICATION
w
.u
.c
-li
w
w
w
ft
w
-li
w
.u
.c
w
6.1DOOR PRE-OPENING
p
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
-li
w
.c
w
It possible in hydraulic systems only. It is necessary to enable APA input signal control (programming ‘+8’ at add. 62).
ft
w
p
ft
-li
w
In order to enable door pre-opening, it is necessary to program parameter TRA (add.19) with value >= ’70’ and
.u
.c
-li
w
parameter 62 with value ‘+16’.
p
w
ft
n
p
.u
.c
-li
This input (APA), if closed in the re-levelling zone will enable the doors opening.
w
.u
.c
w
The safety circuit by-passes the door’s contacts to allow the car moving up to the landing stop.
ft
w
p
w
ft
-li
w
6.2STARTING Y/
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
p
.u
To enable this function, in hydraulic plant, it is necessary to program a value > ‘1’ and < ‘69’ at address 25 (TST).
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
Ùin the figure below shows a possible contactor’s connection scheme for Y/ starting:
w
p
w
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
p
w
Safety Chain
w
f
n
.u
+48V
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
w
w
f
CT
n
-li
w
.u
t.c
p
Control Board
w
n
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
TG TP TD TS
w
TSD APG CPP
w
KY
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
KY
n
K
up
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
KS KD KG
t.c
K KG KD
w
w
f
n
K
-li
w
f
.u
KG KY KD KS
t.c
-li
KY KS RAP
w
p
w
p
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
RCP
t.c
V VL VD
t.
K
w
w
p
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
w
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
TP signal’s activation for STAR power supply → it enables K y activaction (the contactor for STAR power
w
1.
n
li
w
.u
supply).
.c
.
p-
w
w
w
ft
2. TS signal’s activation → it enables K S activaction (the up direction contactor) for engine power supply (STAR w
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
w
STARTING).
p-
ft
w
ift
li
w
TP signal’s disactivation after TST time and consequent activation of K∆ (contactor for DELTA power supply).
.u
3.
.c
p-
w
w
ft
NOTE: when car runs in down direction, TP keeps active and is used as an auxiliar contact for down direction.
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
Futhermore, programming this timer (TST) to an odd value, it is enabled CPP control before TS activation.
p-
ft
w
ft
.c
li
p-
6.3BATTERY
w
p-
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.u
.c
Battery supplies power to the lift control board, serial expansion boards and safety circuit to enable alarm and emergency
p-
ft
w
w
ft
manoeuvres. When electric network is on, the elevator control board charges the battery with its internal battery charge.
li
w
.u
.c
li
w
p-
At address 28 (SBA time) you can decide how long the battery must back up the main power supply when this one goes
w
p-
ft
down. SBA time may be set to a value between ‘0’ and ‘98’ minutes. Programming at addr.28 the value ‘99’ the battery
n
.u
li
w
.u
.c
will back up the power supply for an indeterminate time (until battery discharge).
p-
w
w
w
If battery is connected to BAT connector, EM must be kept close during power outage in order to avoid fault ’81’ code
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
ft
w
If control board turns off, it is not possible turn on again the board through the battery because the battery is excluded for
n
li
w
.u
the first 4 seconds (during start-up phase) after the power supply’s switching on.
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
32
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
6.4SERIAL OR PARALLEL WIRING
w
lif
.u
.c
w
p-
w
The communication from control panel (control board) to car and with each floor can be carried out through:
t
lif
n
w
.u
.c
parallel wiring
p-
w
w
w
ft
n
Wires are connected to each control board connectors (connectors 0-23); so is used 1 wire for each signal. Ref.
w
.u
.c
-li
w
paragraph 2.5
w
w
ft
w
n
serial wiring ( programming ‘64’ at add. 11)
-li
w
.u
.c
w
Inputs and outputs are sent to the control board and turn into serial inputs and outputs thanks to car serial expansion
p
w
ft
n
n
.u
boards (SERCAR_LCD...) or landing serial expansion boards (VEG0600, VEG0700, FLOORDIS_01..). Ref.
.c
-li
w
.c
ft
chapter 10.
w
p
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
NOTE: mixed wiring is possible (e.g. a serial display can be connected to a parallel system)
p
w
ft
n
p
.u
.c
-li
w
.u
.c
ft
w
p
w
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
SENSORS LAYOUT
p
w
ft
p
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
The control board is able to manage three different magnetic sensors layout:
w
w
p
w
w
f
.u
DA\DB layout;
t.c
-li
w
p
DA\DB reverse sensor layout;
w
w
f
n
.u
-li
IF\ICV layout. w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
w
The second configuration (DA\DB reverse sensor layout) should be used only when it is not possible to carry out system
w
w
w
f
n
with DA\DB slowing down magnetic sensor layout. The choice through these system type (DA\DB normal, DA\DB
-li
w
.u
t.c
p
w
n
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
n
up
f
n
.u
0 DA\DB normal magnetic sensors layout
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
p
f
n
.u
14 32 ICV\IF magnetic sensors layout
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
w
w
p
w
f
0 IF\DB e ICV/DA open at floor
n
-li
w
f
.u
15
.c
-li
w
w
64 IF\DB e ICV/DA closed at floor
p
w
ft
w
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
.
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
w
p-
ft
w
ift
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
p-
ft
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
p-
w
p-
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
w
p-
w
p-
ft
n
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
33
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
n w w
w ift w up cn
w
.u .c w .u
.c w p- n w
-li
f w p
n w li .u t.c w
w ft w p n w
-li
ft
.u .c w .u .c
w p- n w
-li
f w p n
w li .u t.c w
w ft w p n w
-li
ft w
.u .c w
Layout
(A) ICV\IF
n w
-li
f .u .c w
w
p- t.c w p n w
.u w
RD IF ICV RS
li
RD IF ICV RS
w ft w p- n w
-li
f w
.u
.u .c w .u t.c p-
n w li ft w p n w
p-
li .u .c w w lif
t.c
ft w n w
-li
f .u n
.c w
p-
.u t.c w p
n w li ft w p n w -li
-li .u .c w w ft w
ft w n w
-li
f .u .c
w p n
Optional
p-
layout
.c w .u t.c
n w li ft w p n w -li
.u .c w w ft w
w n w
-li
f .u .c w
RD IF ICV RS
p
RD IF ICV RS
w
p-
.u t.c w w
w
Optional
li
34
w ft w p n w
-li
ft w
.u
p
.u .c w .u .c
w n w
-li
f w p n w
w
p-
li .u t.c w w
w ft w p- n w
-li
ft w
.u
.u .c w .u .c p-
n w li ft w p n w
p- w lif
Optional
li .u .c w
layout
n -li .u t.c
.u
ft
.c w p- w f w n
n w li .u t.c w
p-
p- w ft w p n w lif
RD IF ICV RS
t
RD IF ICV RS
li .u .c w
Optional
.c p-
n w li .u t.c w
w ft w p n w
-li
ft w
.u .c w .u .c
n -li w
Zone
w w f n
LLING
w
p-
.u t.c w p
w li ft w p n w -li
.u .c w w ft w
n w
-li
f .u .c w
w p n
Zone
p-
li .u t.c w w
ft w p n w
-li .u
RELEVE SLOWING DOWN
.c w .u
ft
.c w p-
n w
-li
f w p n w
. t. w lif
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
w
lif
.u
.c
w
6.6 ENLARGED SLOWING DOWN ZONE AND NON-REGULAR
p-
t
lif
n
w
.u
.c
p-
w
FLOOR DISTANCES
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
-li
w
w
The control board is also able to manage particular magnets layout as non-regular interfloor distance and enlarged
ft
w
n
slowing down zone.
-li
w
.u
.c
p
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
-li
w
.c
ft
w
p
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
p
w
ft
n
p
.u
.c
-li
w
Non regular landings slowdown d<XB:
.u
.c
ft
w
p
w
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
p
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
n
Layout layout
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
p
w
w
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
.u
t.c
p
w
n
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
n
Xn
up
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
XB
p
f
n
XL
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
p
f
n
.u
-li
w
d
.u
t.c
t.
w
w
p
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
w
XL XB
n
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
Xn w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
.
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
w
p-
ft
w
ift
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
p-
ft
w
ft
li
w
.u
IF ICV IF ICV
.c
li
p-
w
p-
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
w
ft
Legend
li
w
.u
.c
li
w
p-
w
d= distance of gap
p-
ft
n
.u
li
w
.c
p-
w
w
w
w
.u
.c
li
w
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
Fast System with enlarged slowdown at all floors: these plants need a slowing down zone larger then an half
n
.u
.c
li
w
normal distance between two consecutive floors, so-called ‘enlarged slowing down zone’. To guarantee an
p-
ft
w
35
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
enlarged slowing down zone it is sufficient to enable the appropriate function programming at address ‘2’ the value
w
lif
.u
‘32’ or ‘48’. Enabling this function and programming the CHF time (address 29) with value ‘97’, the RCPV time
.c
w
p-
t
(address 23) becomes the slowdown delay from average speed V1P.
lif
n
w
.u
.c
Long slowdown: the slowdown space is defined ‘Long’ when it is larger then an half normal distance between two
p-
w
w
w
ft
n
consecutive floor, that is when slowdown begins leaving the slowing down magnetic sensor of the previous floor. If
w
.u
.c
-li
w
this particular management involved only few landings, at most 3 floors, these landings must be set at addresses
w
w
ft
w
n
35(PB1), 40 (PB2) and 42 (PB3), inserting a value equal to the sum of the lower landing of the pair and 50, without
-li
w
.u
.c
programming the ‘enlarged slowing down zone’ function (insert at address 2 value ‘+0’ or ‘16’).
p
w
ft
n
The dual situation is also possible. If you need an enlarged slowing down zone for all floors (ind.2 value '32 'or '48')
n
.u
.c
-li
w
.c
you can program up to a maximum of 3 floors with normal slowing down zone to the addresses 35 (PB1), 40 (PB2 )
ft
w
p
ft
n
and 42 (PB3) inserting a value equal to the sum of the lower landing of the pair and 50.
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
p
w
ft
n
p
.u
.c
-li
w
.u
.c
Layout layout
ft
w
p
w
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
p
RD IF ICV RS RD IF ICV RS
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
UPPER FLOOR
p
w
w
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
w
w
f
Slowing down
n
-li
w
.u
t.c
direction zone
w
p
w
at floor 2
n
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
Slowing up
t.c
w
w
w
direction at
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
upper floor
t.c
-li
p
w
n
up
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
f
n
FLOOR 2
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
p
f
n
.u
Slowing down
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
direction zone at
w
w
p
w
f
n
floor 1
-li
w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
w
.u
li
w
Slowing up
.u
.c
p-
w
direction at
w
w
ft
floor 2 w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
RELEVE
w
LLING
li
w
FLOOR 1
.u
.c
.
p-
w
w
Zone
w
ft
w
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
w
p-
ft
w
ift
Slowing down
li
w
.u
.c
p-
direction zone
w
w
ft
at first floor
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
Slowing up
p-
ft
w
direction at
ft
li
w
.u
.c
floor 1
li
p-
w
p-
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
NOTE*
w
ft
RELEVE
li
w
.u
.c
li
w
FIRST FLOOR
p-
LLING
w
p-
ft
Zone
n
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
w
.u
RD IF ICV RS RD IF ICV RS
w
plant only)
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
36
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
n w w
w ift w up cn
w
.u .c w .u
.c w p- n w
-li
f w p
n w li .u t.c w
w ft w p n w
-li
ft
.u .c w .u .c
w p- n w
-li
f w p n
w
7
.u t.c
15
14
w li ft w p n w -li
w ft w
ADDRESS
.c
Programming:
.u n w -li .u .c w
IF
w
p- w f w p n w
IF
li .u t.c w
w ft w p- n w
-li
f w
.u
.c
ICV s
.u w
ICVd
.u t.c p-
n w li
w p n w
0
0
p- ft ICV
w lif
64
32
li .u .c w t.c
VALUE
n .u
Control board
-li
ft w w f TD n
TS
.c w
p-
.u t.c w p
n w li ft w p n w -li
-li .u .c w w ft w
IF e ICV close at landing
ft w n w
-li
f .u .c
.c w
p- t.c w p n
n w li .u n w -li
.u
ft
.c w p w ft w
w n w -li .u .c w
w
p- w f t.c w p n w
li .u w
37
w ft w p n w
-li
ft w
.u
p
.u .c w .u .c
w n w
-li
f n w
RD IF ICVd ICVs RS
w
p-
.u t.c w p w
w
.u .c p-
n w li ft w p n w
FUCTION
li n -li .u t.c
ft w w f
IF
FLOOR 1
.u .c w
p- t.c w p-
IF
n w li .u n w
floor 1
p- ft w p w lif
FIRST FLOOR
t
UPPER FLOOR
TS
li .u .c w
ICV s
.c
at floor 1
ft w n -li .u
Slowing up
direction at
w f n
at first floor
upper floor w p
Slowing up
direction at
.c p-
n w .u t.c w
Slowing down
ICV
direction zone
li
Slowing down
direction zone
w n
Control board
-li
ft w p w
TD
.c ft w
ICVd
.u n w -li .u .c w
w p- w f w p n
w li .u t.c w
IF e ICV open at landing
w ft w p n w
-li
ft w
.u .c w .u .c
n w
-li
f w p n w
p-
li .u t.c w w
ft w p n w
-li .u
.c w .u
ft
.c w p-
n w
-li
f w p n w
. t. w lif
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
w
lif
.u
.c
Non-regular landings (pair of ‘next-landings’): it is defined as a floor whose distance from the upper floor is
w
p-
t
lif
n
smaller than a regular slowing down zone. This landings must be setup at addresses 35, 40, and 42.
w
.u
.c
p-
The car will start to slow down entering in the slowing down magnetic sensor of the previous floor of the couple
w
w
w
ft
n
with a delay time programmable at address 23 (RCPV time) with a value from 0 to 99 tenth of seconds. When car
w
.u
.c
-li
w
runs through between the ‘next-landing’, magnetic sensor must properly be placed in order to use enlarged slowing
w
w
ft
w
n
down zone operation to obtain an accurate levelling, without resort to a slow speed run.
-li
w
.u
.c
p
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
-li
w
.c
ft
w
p
ft
-li
w
(A) ICV\IF (B) Normal DA\DB
.u
.c
-li
w
Layout layout
p
w
ft
n
p
.u
.c
-li
w
.u
ft
w
p
a floor more than 2)
w
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
p
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
4-Slowing down direction
p
w
w
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
n
FLOOR 2
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
w
3-Slowing up direction
w
f
n
-li
w
.u
t.c
from floor 2)
w
A*
p
w
n
f
n
.u
dx
t.c
-li
w
2-Slowing up direction
t.c
w
B*
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
from floor 1)
.u
Ind.35=1
t.c
-li
p
w
n
up
(first floor)
f
n
.u
t.c
FLOOR 1
-li
w
t.c
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
p
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
w
w
p
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
w
.u
li
w
.u
p-
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
n
Very next landings: when the interfloor distance between the two next-landings is not sufficient to place the
li
w
.u
.c
.
slowing down magnets, the next-landings’ zone is covered at slow speed (programming ‘+8’ at address 63 and
p-
w
w
w
ft
.u
.c
li
w
.c
w
p-
ft
w
As shown in Figure 1, slowing down magnets can be placed or not, that depends on interfloor distance.
ift
li
w
.u
Using DA/DB magnets layout, the extreme floor sensor (RS or RD) zone do not superimpose the slowing down sensor
.c
p-
w
(IF or ICV) zone; for this reason slowing down sensor at the extreme landing is shorter than the other ones.
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
Figure 2 shows the situations in which, slowing down zone or interfloor distance need the partial or complete
p-
ft
w
ft
.c
li
p-
w
p-
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
w
p-
w
p-
ft
n
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
38
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
When ‘next-landing’ the extreme floor phasing sensor zone must not cover 2 floors (ref. figures 2.B and 2.D), so
w
lif
.u
during synchronising phase it is necessary insert a second extreme floor phasing sensor for slowing down (RS2
.c
w
p-
t
and/or RD2, auxiliary extreme floor phasing sensors for car pre-slowing down), wired in this way.
lif
n
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
-li
w
w
w
ft
w
p
RD2 RS2
n
C B
-li
w
RD
.u
O O
.c
G
RD TG
w
N A
p
w
ft
n
RS T R
n
TD TS
.u
.c
R D
-li
w RS
.c
ft
w
p
L
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
p
w
ft
n
p
.u
The use of auxiliary extreme landing sensors is an alternative solution when there is an ‘enlarged slowing down’ zone,
.c
-li
w
.u
.c
ft
w
p
w
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
IF ICV RS RS2
p
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
UPPER
p
w
w
f
FLOOR
.u
t.c
-li
w
p
w
w
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
.u
t.c
p
w
n
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
w
f
(B) Pair of ‘next-landing’ at the upper floor
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
n
up
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
p
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
w
w
p
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
w
.u
li
LOWER
w
.u
.c
p-
w
FLOOR
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
RD2 RD IF ICV
w
p-
ft
w
.c
.
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
n
.u
w
p-
ft
w
ift
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
Examples: programming examples to obtain different combination of normal floor, enlarged slowing down and non-
p-
ft
w
ft
regular landings.
li
w
.u
.c
li
p-
w
p-
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
Non-Regular
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
Landings
w
ft
‘Next-Landings’
.c
li
w
p-
w
p-
ft
.u
li
w
.u
.c
0 or 16 99 99 99
p-
ft
0 or 16 1 7 99
w
.c
li
w
0 or 16 1 7 53
p-
ft
w
32 or 48 99 99 99
li
w
.c
p-
32 or 48 1 7 99
w
ft
32 or 48 1 7 53
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
39
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
6.7DELAYED STOPPING
w
lif
.u
.c
w
p-
w
It is possible to delay the car stop of a programmable time (TRIF). This delay time can be programmed at add. 26 up to
t
lif
n
w
9.9 seconds in units of 1 tenth of second. Stop delaying allows to decrease the re-levelling numbers.
.u
.c
p-
w
If the programmed time is too long or stop magnet is too short, the car surpasses the stop zone, fault code ‘42’ is signalled
w
w
ft
w
and in any case the car will stops crossing IF. Inspection service mode do not manage the fault ‘42’ control.
.u
.c
-li
w
w
w
TRIF delay is always active.
ft
w
n
In rope plant, setting parameter 31 (L13) at ‘99’, motor contactors deactivation is delayed of TRIF time after CS1 input
-li
w
.u
.c
w
deactivation that controls break opening. The RU output can be used for inverter moving enabling to allow controlled
p
w
ft
n
n
.u
stop.
.c
-li
w
.c
ft
w
p
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
CM1, CM2 and INT (CM3) are the inputs for the photocells and safety reopening system signals for 1° entance, 2°
p
w
ft
n
p
.u
entrance and 3° entrance ( respectively AP, AP2 and SCP).
.c
-li
w
.u
.c
To make work CM2 and INT (CM3) as safety reopening input signals for 2° and 3° entrance, it is necessary to enable the
ft
w
p
w
ft
n
second and the third access programming the opportune values at address ‘0’and ‘3’.
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
w
If one of this inputs is opened:
p
w
ft
p
.u
-li
w
Disable the closing of the door for the respective access and command a reopening (if door were closing). Ref.
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
paragraph 6.12
w
f
.u
Cancel the call.
t.c
-li
w
p
w
Extend the opening door time.
w
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
When the doors are closed (at input CS there is the 48V signal) this inputs are disabled.
w
p
w
w
At all floor are enabled only the inputs respective to the open entrances.
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
This inputs can be used to control the closing contacts of the external manual doors.
w
w
f
6.9GONG
n
-li
w
.u
t.c
p
w
n
At the add. ‘8’ and ‘9’ it is possible to program this functions:
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
w
w
1 or 2 impulses in down direction run (in up direction there always may be only 1 gong):
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
n
up
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
‘+0’ or ‘1’ ‘+0’ or ‘4’ Gong during speed change, 1 Gong in up direction and 1 in down direction run
t.c
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
p
w
‘+2’ or ‘3’ ‘+8’ or ‘12’ Gong during car stopping, 1 Gong in up direction e 2 in down direction run
p
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
w
The gong impulse time is programmable at address ‘20’ (TIG time) within range 245 tenths of seconds.
w
p
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
To disable the GONG signal you must set the TIG time to 0.
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
The Gong is also disabled during programming procedure (PRESET = ON), during inspection operation and when the
w
.u
li
w
system is blocked.
.u
.c
p-
w
w
If 2 gongs are used, the time interval between the two impulses is of 1 second (not programmable).
w
ft
w
6.10 LAW ‘13’ OPERATION
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
The Law ‘13’ is the legislation that regulates the management of the alarm. It provides for a defined sequence of events:
li
w
.u
.c
.
p-
w
w
w
Press the ALARM button (connected on inputs AL+ and AL-) for a fixed time of 0.5 s to activate intermittently the
ft
w
n
.u
.c
li
w
alarm’s signalling on output SA. The alarm’s signalling stays on even after you release the button.
.c
w
p-
ft
w
Pressing ALARM RECEIVED button (connected on input AR) turns off the alarm signal SA and activates the alarm
ift
li
w
.u
.c
Pressing the ALARM RESET button (connected on RES) or activating a manual call (in car or external), both signals
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
li
p-
w
p-
ft
Pressing the doors closing push button (PCP) or any car call push button, TAP (waiting time with open door) is cancelled.
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
p-
ft
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
w
p-
w
p-
PAT output is used for the retiring cam. With manual doors is available even CP output for this function programming ‘0’
w
ft
n
.u
or ‘32’ at add. 2 or activating OPERATOR ON during run function (add. 12, value ‘2’ or ‘3’). It is activated at the start
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
of service (also in inspection mode), even if door are still opened, and it is disabled going to stop.
w
ft
6.13 DOORS
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.c
p-
w
w
ft
TAP add. 16: it is the time the door remains open with car reserved signal active. This timer is cancelled when the
n
.u
.c
li
w
PCP button is pushed or when a car calling button is pushed. If car is at landing, there are not reservations and the
p-
ft
w
40
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
system is programmed to do the parking with close doors (add. 1 value ‘8’ or ‘12’), TAP is the time the plant wait
w
lif
.u
before closing the doors and start to serve another booking (in collective operation).
.c
w
p-
t
When car is at landing and there are already others reservations, it is the time after which doors close and the car
lif
n
w
starts again.
.u
.c
p-
w
w
TOP add. 17: maximum time for door opening command
ft
w
.u
.c
TCH add. 18: maximum time for door closing command. The closing relay remains ON until the complete closure,
-li
w
w
w
ft
which is marked by the presence manoeuvre voltage on input CS, that works as limit switch. The maximum time of
w
-li
w
closing TCH must be greater than or equal to the time actually used to close the door. If the door’s check is enabled
.u
.c
w
(programming the value ‘16’ or ‘48’ at address 10), the activation of CPP input is used as confirmation of the door
p
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
closing in addition to the presence of manoeuvre voltage on input CS ( this means that the closing relay stay ON
-li
w
.c
ft
until CPP input is activated even if the manoeuvre voltage is present on input CS ).
w
p
ft
-li
w
.u
The door closing command can persist for all the car run if it is enabled the OPERATOR ON function
.c
-li
w
programming the value ‘2’ or ‘3’ at address 12.
p
w
ft
n
p
.u
TRA add. 19: door opening delay after stop at floor if TRA<’70’, otherwise (TRA>=70, delay=TRA-70) it is the
.c
-li
w
.u
.c
ft
w
delay on door opening (pre-opening) after the activation of APA input. APA input check must be enabled
p
w
ft
-li
w
programming the value ‘+8’ at address 62.
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
p
.u
6.13.1 Door Checking
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
To enable this checks it is necessary to program at address 10 the value ‘16’ or ‘48’ and it is necessary to connect the
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
door relays control contact in series with the relative inputs APG and CPP (do not connect this inputs if this control is not
p
w
w
active). If the control is not enabled connect at least a normally close contact of opening relay RAP at APG input or at
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
CM input.
w
w
p
w
n
The fault relative to door control are:
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
Fault ‘50’ and ‘61’: if the doors don’t close, connector CS remain open for all the closing time TCH or RCP (closing
w
w
f
n
-li
w
external relay) is disabled (CPP remains closed) after delay time (RITUSC) on outputs and delay time (RITING) on
.u
t.c
w
inputs, board returns one of the following errors:
p
w
n
f
fault ‘50’: If CPP input is closed means that the external closing relay RCP is faulty or doors are closed with
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
safety contact that is out of order;
w
f
n
fault ‘61’:If CPP opens means that RCP and door safety contacts are OK while door operator is faulty;
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
In any case the board opens the doors and tries to close them again for a number of attempts that depend on the
p
w
n
up
value programmed at address 60 (NUMCH). If the problem persist the board return fault ‘0-31’ (missed start). With
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
the reopening devices activation (CM, PAP, etc...), the number of doors closing attempts made is carried to zero
w
f
n
-li
w
to avoid the missed start fault due to the continuos activation of these opening devices.
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
Fault ‘48’ and ‘49’: if the doors don’t open, connector CS remains live for all the opening time TOP, or RAP
p
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
(external opening relay) is disabled (APG remains closed) after delay on RITUSC outputs and antirebounce time on
t.c
t.
w
w
p
w
f
RITING inputs, the board cancels all the booked calls and returns one of the following errors:
n
-li
w
f
.u
fault ‘49’: If APG input remains closed (means that the external opening relay RAP is faulty or doors are
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
w
.u
li
w
fault ‘48’: If APG is opened means that RAP is OK while door operator is faulty, so the board returns fault
.u
.c
p-
w
w
‘48’.
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
NOTE: If the door’s check is not enabled (programming at address 10 value ‘0’ or ‘32’), faults ‘61’ and ‘48’ remains
w
p-
ft
w
active. Also, with the door’s check disabled, the opening command is maintained for at least 5 seconds after the
n
li
w
.u
.c
.
p-
w
deactivation of CS input.
w
w
ft
The doors control is automatically disabled during inspection mode and emergency mode. w
n
.u
.c
li
w
ATTENTION: The door’s check is used to enable or disable the reporting of door failures. The procedures for reopening
.c
w
p-
ft
w
ift
and reclosing attempts in case of malfunctions in the door management remain unchanged regardless of the fact that the
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
ft
w
ft
li
w
.u
To enable this function is necessary to set the parameter at address 30, with an odd value.
.c
li
p-
w
p-
To enable the ‘door opening exclusion during testing operation’ it is necessary to keep pressed PCP push button (keep
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
active the PCP input). Doors will be closed even if interlock will be opened.
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
w
ft
li
w
.u
p-
w
p-
ft
To select the ‘manual doors’ option program value ‘0’ or ‘32’ at address 2.
n
.u
li
w
.u
.c
In that case:
p-
w
w
w
ft
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
Two operation modes are possible depending on the value programmed at address 1.
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
41
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
Value ‘0’ or ‘4’ (Parking with open doors): the board accepts the call with input CS open too. The control board will
w
lif
.u
wait the door safety interlock signals before to generate (after TMP time) a ‘missed start’ fault.
.c
w
p-
Value ‘8’ or ‘12’ (Parking with closed doors): if CS input remains open all the calls are cancelled and the plants
t
lif
n
w
remains reserved.
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
External door’s
.u
Car
.c
-li
w Stop Blocks
w
closing contacts door
ft
w
-li
w
.u
.c
Block are closed by Retiring cams
p
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
-li
w
.c
ALT CT
w
CS
ft
w
p
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
p
w
ft
n
After the last served call, the ‘Reserved’ car signalling’s lights stay on for the TOC time.
p
.u
.c
-li
w
.u
.c
The door faults and the closing and opening time are ignored.
ft
w
p
w
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
p
.u
To select the ‘automatic doors’ option program ‘16’ or ‘48’ at address 2.
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
In that case:
p
w
w
CP output drives the closing of the doors;
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
AP output drives the opening of the doors of the first access;
p
w
w
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
6.13.5 Semi-Automatic Doors
w
p
w
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
w
With semi-automatic doors (that means automatic car doors and manual landing doors) you have to select the same option
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
.u
t.c
Landing doors safety contacts must be placed before the ALT terminal.
w
p
w
n
For hydraulic plant, to allow RE-LEVELLING even with landing doors open, it is necessary not disturb ALT input with
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
approach contacts and it is necessary also to connect a relay to the approach end and stop the photocell (with a normally
t.c
w
w
w
open contact) or closing the PAP input to avoid car automatic doors closing with the manual landing doors opened.
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
n
6.13.6 Multi-Entrances
up
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
We speak about Multi-Entrances when there is more than an access to the car ( Accesses on different car sides).
w
w
f
n
-li
w
In this case car has 2 or 3 distinct entrances. Entrances are selective when operations of the 2 or 3 entrances at the same
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
landing are independents. Each selective door is considered like a separated stop, then, system has a stops number bigger
p
w
p
f
n
.u
than the landings one.
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
For each landing, it is possible to program at most 3 entrances. Each entrance is driven through the AP, AP2 e SCP
w
w
p
w
f
n
-li
signals and controlled by CM1, CM2 e INT(CM3) photosensors. They are programmed at addresses from 50 up to 59. w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
w
.u
Floor No.
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
1 → AP (1° entrance)
w
w
ft
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
.
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
n
.u
the third entrance on output SCP must be enabled programming ‘64’ at address 3.
.c
li
w
.c
w
p-
For tunnel-opening between the 2 entrances at one landing, program ‘+4’ at the relative floor. For this function the
ft
w
ift
li
w
.u
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
p-
w
p-
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
For Example
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
w
ft
li
w
.u
p-
w
ft
.u
li
w
.u
.c
w
w
ft
w
.u
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
42
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
The bold numbers represent the car call push-buttons for each floor and for each opening-side. The numbers in brackets
w
lif
.u
(red numbers) represent the corresponding signals that must be connected to the control board or to the serial expansion
.c
w
p-
t
board. Ref paragraph 2.5 and chapter 10.
lif
n
w
At floor 4 there are two independent call push-buttons (selective opening).
.u
.c
p-
w
w
At floor 6 we have the tunnel-opening and the two push-buttons corresponding to the two opening side are wired to the
ft
w
.u
.c
same board terminal because they are managed as a single call push-button.
-li
w
w
w
ft
At address 32 (NP parameter) must be programmed the number of floors (8) because the number of stops are
w
-li
w
automatically calculated.
.u
.c
p
NOTE:For plant with number of floor more than 10, the board active always the AP output (from 11
ft
n
n
.u
.c
-li
floor onwards) w
.c
ft
w
p
ft
-li
w
.u
6.13.7 OPERATOR ON During Run
.c
-li
p
w
ft
n
p
This function can be useful to manage electronic doors operators that have not limit switches signals. To enable this
n
.u
.c
-li
w
.u
.c
function program ‘2’ or ‘3’ at the add. 12. Opening and closing commands are active until the system is reserved and the
ft
w
p
w
ft
n
control of maximum opening (TOP) and closing (TCH) times is excluded. The doors open and close commands remains
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
active for a maximum time that is the missed start time TMP (add.21). If the commands reach this time the fault 67 is
p
w
ft
p
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
This test can be made through board terminals (RS, RD, IF, ICV). It is necessary to provide bridges to the synchronising
p
w
w
f
sensors and magnetic sensors of the extreme landing to create a floors count error.
n
.u
-li
w
.u
6.15 PARKING
t.c
w
w
p
w
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
.u
t.c
Parking operation at landing NST: after a programmable TSN time at add. 27 from ‘0’ to ‘99’ x 10 seconds from
w
p
w
n
f
n
.u
reserved signal deactivation, car is moved to parking flor (NST) programmed at address 34. this operation is disabled
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
if NST > stops number.
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
Parking operation at lower floor after 14 minutes: only for hydraulic lift there is an automatic operation that
w
p
w
moves car to the lower floor after 14 minutes from reserved signal deactivation, programming ‘0’ or ‘2’ at add. 12.
n
up
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
When the car is at ground floor (‘0’ floor) cannot be move to other destinations for parking.
t.c
w
w
f
n
-li
w
During Firefighters service, Fire service and internal mode any automatic parking operation is disabled. If parking
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
operation is with close doors (SPC, Ref. paragraph 6.14.2), after this operation doors do not open and there is not
p
w
p
f
n
.u
GONG.
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
w
w
p
w
f
n
-li
6.15.2 Parking With Open or Close Doors w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
After last service, car can stand with open door (SPA) programming ‘0’ or ‘4’ at add. 1, or with close door (SPC)
ft
w
.u
li
w
programming ‘8’ or ‘12’ at add. 1. If SPC is enabled, at the end of parking operation, the doors do not open and there is
.u
.c
p-
w
w
not GONG.
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
If the system is programmend SPC (Parking with close door), it is possible to program up to 2 stops with parking with
w
p-
ft
w
open door (SPA): one at address. 36 (SPA1) and the other at address 37 (SPA2). Dually If the system is programmend
n
li
w
.u
SPA (Parking with open door), it is possible to program up to 2 stops with parking with close door (SPC): one at address.
.c
.
p-
w
w
w
w
n
.u
.c
li
w
With the open doors parking active, doing a call at the same floor activates the GONG signal.
.c
w
p-
ft
To exclude the 2 stops with ‘inverted’ parking mode, program a value greater than ‘31’at add. 36 and 37.
w
ift
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
6.16 TIMERS
.c
li
w
.c
p-
ft
w
ft
li
w
.c
li
p-
w
p-
ft
.u
.c
li
w
.u
This delay may be set to a value from ‘0’ to ‘96’ tenths of second at address 31 (L13). It is disabled when ‘99’ value
.c
p-
ft
w
w
ft
is programmed, and CS1/RU are used for the safety circuit or for inverter control.
li
w
.u
.c
li
w
ft
This delay may be set to a value from ‘0’ to ‘95’ tenths of second at address 29 (CHF).
n
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
43
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
w
lif
.u
.c
Inputs CS1/FS3
w
p-
t
T
lif
n
w
.u
.c
Output RU
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
Output CPF
.c
-li
w T
w
w
ft
w
p
the first timer concerns the excitement instant, the second one the de-energize instant.
-li
w
.u
.c
6.17 PLANT TYPES: SINGLE AUTOMATIC PUSH BUTTON
p
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
-li
w
(SINGLE CALL), COLLECTIVE OR DUPLEX PLANT
.c
ft
w
p
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
p
w
ft
n
6.17.1 Single Automatic Push Button Plant (Single Call)
p
.u
.c
-li
w
.u
.c
It accepts only one call at time. The control board works up to 12 stops without the use of serial expansion board.
ft
w
p
w
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
p
.u
-li
It is divided into 2 ways: w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
n
Car calls
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
Landing calls
p
w
w
f
n
.u
-li
w
It accepts all calls, but landing calls are accepted only during car down run and if load is not full.
.u
t.c
w
w
p
Up to 32 stops: up to 12 stops with DEC16, the board to decode the position, to reach 32 stops control board needs
w
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
serial expansion modules. Duplex plants are possible thanks to a connection between 2 control boards;
-li
w
w
w
Multiplex systems are possible up to 4 lifts thanks to a multiplex central board
w
f
n
-li
w
.u
t.c
p
6.17.3 Up / Down Collective
w
n
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
Car calls
t.c
-li
w
p
Up Landing calls
w
n
up
f
n
.u
t.c
Down landing calls
-li
w
t.c
w
w
f
n
It accepts all calls, but landing calls priority depending on run direction and if load is not full.
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
Up to 32 stops: up to 8 stops with DEC16 board to decode the position, to reach 32 stops control board needs serial
w
p
w
p
expansion modules.
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
w
w
p
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
w
NOTE: Programming at the add. 14, the value ‘16’ or ‘48’ it is possible activate a simplified management of collective
p
.u
li
w
.u
.c
plant. When the arrival at landing happens, all reservation are cancelled; in case of overload activation, all landing
p-
w
w
w
ft
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
.
p-
w
w
ft
In order to manage duplex plant it is necessary setup both control boards and program duplex service mode (‘+4’ at w
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
w
p-
It is necessary also setup one of 2 boards like ‘master’, programming ‘+16’ at parameter 63 of chosen board.
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
p-
w
p-
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.u
All informations will be exchanged between the 2 expansion boards through RS232 imput (9 wires with a serial cross
.c
p-
ft
w
w
cable.
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
w
ft
n
.u
li
w
.u
p-
w
w
w
ft
if both cars are stopped: the landing call is served by the nearest car
w
.u
.c
li
w
if both cars are running: the external call will reach both the control boards but the call will be served from the one
w
p-
ft
w
that can do the work faster. (not necessary is the nearest car). For example, if the first car is nearer then the second
li
w
.u
.c
p-
one, but it has some car calls at the intermediate landings (between car position and destination floor), the second one
w
w
ft
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
44
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
if both cars halt at the same level: the car with ‘master’ control board will reach the destination floor.
w
lif
.u
.c
If serial expansion board are used to collect landing calls you will need 2 board for each call. Each serial expansion board
w
p-
t
lif
n
will be connected with only one control board whereas each landing signals will be connected both to the 2 expansion
w
.u
.c
p-
boards in parallel connection.
w
w
w
ft
n
If a lift is in one of the following cases will send to the other lift its ‘out of order’ state, so the operating one will supply
w
.u
.c
-li
w
all the calls :
w
w
ft
w
-li
w
.u
.c
in inspection service mode
p
w
ft
n
in programming mode
n
.u
.c
-li
w
.c
in faulty state
ft
w
p
ft
n
during syncronizing operation
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
p
w
ft
n
p
.u
.c
-li
w
.u
.c
ft
w
p
w
ft
n
with CCC and CCS inputs active
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
p
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
n
6.17.5 Duplo
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
Enabling the Duplex mode (ref paragraph 6.14.4) in a single automatic call system (address 13 value ‘0’ or ‘8’) you can
p
w
w
f
n
.u
-li
have the Duplo operation. w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
w
f
cn
.u
6.17.6 Multiplex Plant
t.c
-li
w
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
.u
t.c
p
w
n
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
In the rope plant, setting parameter 31(L13) at ‘99’ contactors activation is delayed of TRIF time by CS1 input
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
deactivation (break opening control) whereas RU output can be used to enable inverter moving to allow controlled stop.
t.c
-li
p
Otherwise it can be used the SCP output (if there is not the third entrance, do not programming ‘0’ at add. 3): this output,
w
n
up
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
during standard working, is activated only to the arrival at the destination floor; during phasing mode and inspection
t.c
w
w
mode SCP is activated only to the arrival at extreme floors and remains activated at standing floor.
p
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
In the hydraulic plant, SCP output can be used even as ‘car at landing’ signal.
t.c
-li
p
6.19 SPEED
w
p
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
w
w
p
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
p
w
ft
w
If plant has only one run speed, program ‘4’ or ‘12’ at address 1
p
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
.c
li
w
w
If plant has two speeds (‘high’ and ‘slow’), program ‘0’ or ‘8’ at address 1
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
.
p-
w
w
ft
w
n
.u
.c
li
w
Three speeds:
.c
w
p-
ft
w
ift
.c
p-
ft
Velocity to cover distance larger then 2 o more floors (V2P or high speed)
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
p-
ft
w
High speed is activated when the distance covered is larger then 2 floors and syncronizing/phasing or
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
ft
Programming the time CHF (address 29) with a value >= 97, the CPF output commands the high speed change (V2P).
n
.u
.c
li
w
To setup the slowing down zone for the maximum speed V2P, it is possible to enable the ‘enlarged slowing down zone’
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
function (programming the value ‘32’ or ’48’ at address 2) while, for average speed V1P, the slowdown can be delayed
w
ft
li
w
.u
with the RCPV Time (address 23). If the TST time (address 25) is not programmed with value ‘99’, this delay time
.c
li
w
p-
w
p-
ft
(RCPV) is active during synchronizing mode too, so the synchronizing sensor must be placed at a lower distance that the
n
.u
li
w
.u
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
45
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
7.
w
w
w
lif
.u
.c
CONTROLS
w
p-
t
lif
n
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
7.1SAFETY CIRCUIT
.c
-li
w
w
w
ft
w
n
To enable safety circuit control do not program ‘+4’ at add. 62 (in this way TMR1 is disabled for general use). When
-li
w
.u
.c
w
this control is enabled and when CS1 is opened re-levelling is automatically disabled.
p
w
ft
n
n
.u
If there are the following situations:
.c
-li
w
.c
ft
w
p
ft
n
-li
w
Plant is not in INSPECTION SERVICE MODE
.u
.c
-li
w
ALT is not activated
p
w
ft
n
p
n
.u
Plant is not in OVERRUN
.c
-li
w
.u
.c
ft
Plant is not in EMERGENCY SERVICE MODE
w
p
w
ft
n
-li
w
Plant is not in PHASING operation
.u
.c
-li
w
w
It is an hydraulic plant with DA/DB sensors configuration
p
w
ft
p
n
.u
Not call is activated
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
p
w
w
f
n
.u
-li
w
IF
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
IS
-li
w
w
w
w
f
n
ID
-li
w
.u
t.c
ON
w
p
RU
w
OFF
n
f
n
.u
open
t.c
-li
w
t.c
CS1
w
close
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
1,5s 4s 4s 1,5s
t.c
-li
p
w
n
up
At ARRIVAL
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
At START
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
Only in IF zone, if after 1,5 seconds (add. 44 – RITUSC) CS1 remains open the plant will halt and it will be showed fault
w
p
w
p
‘83’.
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
To activate the safety circuit can be used the output RU.
w
w
p
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
Programming at address 31 the value ‘98’ RU output is activated in the door’s opening zone if it is enabled the check on
w
p
w
ft
w
APA input (value ‘+8’ at address 61) , otherwise is actifìvated when the stop zone is reached.
n
.u
li
w
.u
.c
Halt ‘83’ is permanent, so it is possible to unlock the plant only pressing SPEEDY push button on DISP900 programming
p-
w
w
w
ft
keypad. This halt can be disabled programming ‘+4’ at add. 62. In this way CS1 input is disabled but RU remains w
.u
.c
li
w
activated.
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
.
7.2RE-OPENING DEVICES
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
n
.u
.c
li
w
Re-opening device check signals if photocells, safety reopening systems (CM), doors open push button (PAP) remain
.c
w
p-
ft
w
active for more than the programmable time (seconds) at the address 21 TMP. If this happens the fault ‘67’ is generated.
ift
li
w
.u
.c
Regarding inputs CM and PAP failure is triggered only if the system is programmed as collective and if there is a
p-
w
w
ft
reservation active.
n
.u
.c
li
w
The fault is generated regardless of the type of installation (collective or single automatic call) if the AP output remains
.c
p-
ft
w
active for a time longer than the value setted at address 21.
ft
li
w
.u
7.3MAXIMUM TRAVEL
.c
li
p-
w
p-
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.u
TMC is the maximum travel (run) time; this is the time within the car can reach one floor. TMC is programmable from
.c
p-
ft
w
10 to 99 seconds at add.22.
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
w
p-
w
p-
.u
li
w
If TMC > 80 MAXIMUM TRAVEL TIME = 80sec. +(TMC – 80) tenth * 10 DEFAULT VALUE
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
It’s enough to program a time for one travel of only one floor becouse this timer is resetted in stop zone and when
w
li
w
.u
entering or leaving the slowing down zone. Over this maximum time, the control board generates one of the following
.c
p-
w
w
faults depending on the situation in which is the car the timer has expired:
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
46
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
Alarm 76: Maximum travel time for floor approaching in up direction expired;
w
lif
.u
Alarm 77: Maximum travel time for floor approaching in down direction expired;
.c
w
p-
t
Alarm 78: Maximum travel time for high speed in up direction expired ;
lif
n
w
Alarm 79: Maximum travel time for high speed in down direction expired;
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
n
After the occurrence of one of this alarms the system is not blocked and you can retry. If the maximum travel time espires
w
.u
.c
-li
w
for two consecutives times than the system enter in permanent halt signalling the ‘80’ fault code. The HALT can be
w
w
ft
w
p
immediate (‘4’ or ‘12’ at add. 5) or it can happen after the return operation at landing ‘0’ (P0) (programming ‘0’ or ‘8’
-li
w
.u
.c
at add. 5).
p
w
ft
n
Plant can be unlocked only pressing SPEEDY on the programming keypad DISP900 or entering in INSPECTION
n
.u
.c
-li
w
.c
SERVICE mode.
ft
w
p
ft
n
During EMERGENCY and INSPECTION SERVICE operations this timer is disabled.
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
7.4RUN DIRECTION
p
w
ft
n
p
.u
.c
-li
w
.u
ft
w
p
w
ft
If the car, leaving from a point out of the synchronizing sensors (an intermediate floor), moves toward opposite direction
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
of the one commanded, when it reaches synchronising sensor is halted (only if immediate halt is activated programming
p
w
ft
‘4’ or ‘12’ at add. 5) and control board shows ‘84’ fault code. The control board knows that car is moving in the
p
.u
-li
w
.u
opposite direction becouse after TD activation the car reaches RS phasing sensor or , after TS activation car reaches RD.
t.c
w
w
p
If car is already in a synchronizing sensor and leaves in a wrong run direction, it goes in overrun signalling the ‘81’
w
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
fault.
p
7.5MOVABLE PLATFORM
w
w
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
w
f
cn
.u
CCO: busy car contact
t.c
-li
w
w
w
CCC: full load contact
w
f
n
-li
CCS: overload contact w
.u
t.c
p
w
n
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
The contacts presence has to be programmed at add. 63, whereas if it is necessary CCC connection directly with the
t.c
w
w
control board, even if there is a serial wiring, need to program ‘+16’ at add. 38.
w
f
n
-li
w
f
CCS is programmable open active (normally close) setting ‘+32’ at the add. 62, otherwise CCS is close active
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
(normally open).
n
up
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
CCO:
w
f
n
-li
w
f
SINGLE CALL PLANTS: when CCO is close, opening doors is activated and plant is busy and do not allow
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
f
n
.u
COLLECTIVE PLANTS: when CCO is open, plant receives one only car call at time (cancel any last internal
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
w
w
reservations)
p
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
CCC:
w
p
w
ft
w
SINGLE CALL PLANTS: when CCC is enable, doors open is activated and car is busy up to load is full
n
.u
li
w
.u
.c
COLLECTIVE PLANTS: when CCC is close, landing calls are not sent but they are stored and will be send
p-
w
w
w
ft
.c
li
w
w
p-
CCS:
w
ft
w
SINGLE CALL PLANTS: when CCS is enable, plant is kept halted with open doors and SNR alarm signal is
li
w
.u
.c
.
p-
w
w
activated. Call is deleted. CCS is not considered outdoor zone and during travel.
w
ft
w
n
.u
COLLECTIVE PLANTS: in the case of SIMPLIFIED COLLECTIVE PLANT (add. 14, ‘16’ or ‘48’), when
.c
li
w
.c
w
p-
ft
CCS is activated, the lift works like in a single automatic push button plant and all reservation are deleted;
w
ift
otherwise, in a standard collective plants (add. 14, ‘0’ or ‘32’), when CCS is activated, it keeps the lift halted
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
with opened doors, SNR ringing is activated and reservations are not cancelled.
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
p-
This three signals’ control is disabled during car travel. (these signals work only when the car is stopped at landing).
w
ft
w
ft
li
7.6ENGINE TEMPERATURE
w
.u
.c
li
p-
w
p-
ft
n
n
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
ft
li
w
.u
If analogic value in input is higher than wanted limit (resistance thermometry > 4K Ω), plant goes in permanent
.c
li
w
p-
w
p-
ft
halt with ‘56’ fault. Unlocking is possible only if TM input measures a resistance thermometry < 1,5K Ω
n
.u
li
w
A normally open contact, connected to temperature sensor (NOT PTC probe), programming the value ‘+2’ at
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
add. 62.
n
w
.u
If temperature sensors are on, engine is automatically halted, safety circuits’power supply is cut off (EXC open) and
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
TM contact is close.
n
li
w
Plant is halted with ‘56’ fault, this fault is permanent only during EMERGENCY mode.
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
47
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
Temperature control engine(TM) in maintenance:
w
lif
.u
Is activated if there is “4”or “12” at the address 5 (immediate block).
.c
w
p-
t
lif
n
w
o The fault blocks the elevator to the next restart from the activation TM (in order to allow completion of the
.u
.c
p-
w
w
run).
ft
w
.u
o
.c
The fault is excluded for 5 seconds from activation of the maintenance (to allow a restart also after the
-li
w
w
w
ft
intervention of the fault).
w
-li
w
.u
.c
p
w
ft
n
n
.u
Plant is halted with ‘56’ fault, this fault is permanent only during EMERGENCY mode.
.c
-li
w
.c
ft
w
p
ft
-li
w
7.7DOORS ZONE
.u
.c
-li
p
w
ft
n
p
.u
Doors zone is the hoistway space where doors can open.
.c
-li
w
.u
.c
ft
This zone is always enable in stop zone (IF in ICV/IF layout or in IF-ICV superinposition in DA/DB layout).
w
p
w
ft
-li
w
In IF/ICV layout, doors zone is disabled when car crosses stop zone and starts a regular service, otherwise, in DA/DB
.u
.c
-li
w
w
layout is deactivated when leaves IF and ICV magnetic sensors.
p
w
ft
p
If APA input is activated programming ‘+8’ at add. 62, doors zone is activated in advance when APA signal is present
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
simultaneously with IF or ICV.
w
p
w
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
p
w
w
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
.u
t.c
p
w
n
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
n
up
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
p
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
w
w
p
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
w
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
.
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
w
p-
ft
w
ift
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
p-
ft
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
p-
w
p-
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
w
p-
w
p-
ft
n
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
48
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
8.
w
w
w
lif
.u
.c
SIGNALLING
w
p-
t
lif
n
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
8.1POSITION /ARRIVAL /RESERVATION
.c
-li
w
w
w
ft
w
-li
w
.u
.c
w
8.1.1 Position Signalling
p
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
-li
w
DECIMAL VALUE POSITION
.c
ft
w
p
ft
n
Decimal value position indicator shows always the floor number
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
In Parlallel system: indication is provided from I/O 0-23 (only single call plants) or from DEC16 board.
p
w
ft
n
In Serial system, these indication are available on VEG0400 and SERCAR_LCD (car serial boards)
p
.u
.c
-li
w
.u
.c
ft
w
p
w
ft
n
BINARY POSITION
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
w
Bynary code position signalling (floor only) is provided from A, B, C, D and SCP binary outputs. For the position it is
p
w
ft
p
necessary to set at the add. 8,the values ‘1’ or ‘3’, only if car calls are connected locally (‘+2’ add. 61).Ref.paragraph 2.5
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
Connecting ABCD to the auxiliary board DEC16 you can decode the position indication of first ten stops from binary
w
w
p
w
w
code to decimal code. The programmed underground levels number has not effects on these outputs (e.g. if the car is in
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
the lower extreme landing ‘-2’, DEC16 will turn on lower lights).
p
w
w
f
ABCD outputs can be negated programming ‘32’ at add. 61.
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
NOTE:
w
w
p
w
n
In the event that the number of floor (ind. 32) is> 16 the output “SCP” is used for binary code.
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
ON = output active (Output closed to GND)
w
w
f
n
-li
w
.u
t.c
p
w
n
Address 61
f
n
.u
t.c
SCP(E) D C B A
-li
w
t.c
w
(+32) (+0)
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
n
up
f
n
.u
OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 2 29
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
OFF OFF OFF ON ON 3 28
w
f
n
-li
w
f
t.c
-li
w
OFF OFF ON OFF ON 5 26
p
w
p
f
n
.u
OFF OFF ON ON OFF 6 25
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
w
w
OFF OFF ON ON ON 7 24
p
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
p
w
.u
li
w
.c
p-
w
w
OFF ON OFF ON ON 11 20
w
ft
w
.u
.c
w
p-
ft
w
OFF ON ON OFF ON 13 18
n
li
w
.u
OFF ON ON ON OFF 14 17
.c
.
p-
w
w
w
ft
OFF ON ON ON ON 15 16
n
w
n
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
ft
ON OFF OFF ON ON 19 12
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
ft
ON OFF ON OFF ON 21 10
n
li
w
.u
.c
li
p-
ON OFF ON ON OFF 22 9
w
p-
ft
ON OFF ON ON ON 23 8
n
.u
.c
li
w
.u
.c
ft
w
w
ft
ON ON OFF OFF ON 25 6
li
w
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ON ON OFF ON OFF 26 5
w
p-
ft
n
ON ON OFF ON ON 27 4
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ON ON ON OFF OFF 28 3
w
w
w
ft
ON ON ON OFF ON 29 2
.u
.c
li
w
ON ON ON ON OFF 30 1
p-
ft
w
ON ON ON ON ON 31 0
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
49
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
DIGITAL position (7 segments plus sign “-“)
w
lif
.u
The digital position signal (7 segments with sign “-“) is available, set the value '+48' at address
.c
w
p-
t
61, used the same outputs for the decoded one pole fore floor (P0.. P7). Ref. paragraph 2.5. and chapter 10.
lif
n
w
The correspondence between the mapping one pole for floor and 7 segment mapping is shown in the table below.
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
-li
TABLE w
w
w
ft
w
Fram one pole for floor to 7 segments
-li
w
.u
1 POLE FOR
.c
7 SEGMENTS
w
a
p
w
FLOOR
ft
n
n
.u
.c
-li
P0 aw
.c
f b
ft
w
P1 b
p
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
P2 c
-li
p
g(-)
ft
g
n
P3 d
p
.u
.c
-li
w
.u
P4 e
.c
ft
w
p
w
P5 f
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
P6 g e c
p
w
ft
p
P7 g(-)
n
.u
-li
w
.u
… …
t.c
w
w
d
p
w
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
p
w
w
f
n
.u
-li
GRAY CODE POSITION: w
.u
t.c
w
w
Gray code position signalling (floor only) is provided from A, B, C, D and SCP . For the position it is necessary to set
p
w
w
f
at the add. 8, the values ‘1’ or ‘3’, only if car calls are connected locally (‘+2’ add. 61).Ref.paragraph 2.5
cn
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
For active this coding it’s need programming the value ‘+16’ and “+32” at add. 61.
w
w
f
n
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
ON = Uscita Attiva (GND)
p
w
n
f
n
.u
OFF = Uscita Disattiva (Aperta)
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
Parametro 61(“+16 “ ”+32”)
w
SCP(E) D C B A
p
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
p
w
n
OFF OFF OFF ON ON 1
up
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
w
f
OFF OFF ON ON OFF 3
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
OFF OFF ON ON ON 4
w
p
w
p
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
w
w
p
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
OFF ON ON OFF ON 8
w
p
w
ft
w
OFF 9
n
ON ON ON ON
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
OFF ON ON ON OFF 10
w
w
w
ft
.c
li
w
w
OFF ON OFF ON ON 12
p-
ft
w
.c
.
p-
w
OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 14
w
w
ft
w
n
ON ON
.c
li
w
.c
w
p-
ON ON OFF OFF ON 16
w
ft
w
ift
li
w
ON ON OFF ON ON 17
.u
.c
p-
w
ON ON OFF ON OFF 18
w
ft
n
n
.u
ON ON ON ON OFF 19
.c
li
w
.c
p-
ft
ON ON ON ON ON 20
w
ft
li
w
.u
ON ON ON OFF ON 21
.c
li
p-
w
p-
ON ON ON OFF OFF 22
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
p-
ft
w
ON OFF ON OFF ON 24
w
ft
li
w
.u
OFF 25
.c
ON ON ON ON
li
w
p-
w
p-
ft
ON OFF ON ON OFF 26
n
.u
li
w
.u
p-
w
w
w
ON OFF OFF ON ON 28
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
50
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
8.1.2 Underground Floors
w
lif
.u
.c
At add. 33 (NS) is possible to program what value visualize on the display when there are underground levels.
w
p-
t
Underground floors number has effect only on the serial displays (car and floors).
lif
n
w
.u
.c
In the following table are resumed the values visualized from display at the lowest floor depending on value programmed
p-
w
w
w
ft
n
at add. 33 (NS).
w
.u
.c
-li
w
w
w
ft
w
“UNDERGROUND FLOORS” TABLE
-li
w
.u
.c
NS Number displayed at floor 0
p
w
ft
n
0 0
n
.u
.c
-li
1 -9 w
.c
ft
w
p
ft
n
2 -8
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
3 -7
p
w
ft
n
p
4 -6
n
.u
.c
-li
w
.u
.c
5 -5
ft
w
p
w
ft
n
6 -4
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
7 -3
p
w
ft
p
.u
8 -2
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
9 -1
w
p
w
w
f
10 0
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
11 1
p
w
w
f
n
.u
12 2
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
13 3
p
w
w
f
cn
.u
14 4
t.c
-li
w
w
w
15 5
w
f
n
-li
16 6 w
.u
t.c
w
17 7
p
w
n
f
n
.u
t.c
18 8
-li
w
t.c
w
w
w
19 9
p
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
20 10
t.c
-li
p
… …
w
n
up
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
In parallel mode, arrival signalling can be supplied in parallel plant from 0-23 connectors (only single call plant) or
w
p
w
p
from the ABCD binary outputs. Arrival on ABCD is available only if the car calls are connected locally (‘+2’ at the add.
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
61) and programming at the add. 8 the value ‘0’ or ‘2’. Ref. paragraph 2.5.
t.
w
w
p
w
f
n
Arrival signalling can be supplied also from car and landing serial expansion boards VEG0400, SERCAR_LCD,
-li
w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
w
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
.u
In parallel mode, reservation signalling can be supplied from 0-23 connectors or from car and landing serial expansion
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
boards VEG0400, SERCAR_LCD, FLOORDIS VEG800 etc. (Ref paragraph 2.5, 10.1 and 10.2).
w
8.2DIRECTION
li
w
.u
.c
.
p-
w
w
w
ft
FS/FD outputs on the control board give run direction indication if it is programmed ‘0’ or ‘32’ at add. 14. w
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
w
p-
The arrow lights ON after the first call and it turns OFF after last stop in the same direction. It never turns OFF on
ft
w
ift
li
w
intermediate stops.
.u
.c
p-
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
p-
1. if there was a landing call for opposite direction, when speed change happens, current arrow turns OFF and a new
ft
w
ft
li
w
arrow turns ON (not important if there is or not a car call). If within TAP (add. 16) time a next car call is not
.u
.c
li
p-
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.u
2. if there was a landing call for the same direction, current arrow remains ON. If within TAP (add. 16) time a next car
.c
p-
ft
w
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
w
p-
w
3. if both external calls are made at that floor, current arrow remains ON up to TAP (add. 16) waiting end, after that an
p-
ft
n
.u
other arrow turns ON. If within TAP (add. 16) time a next car call is not commanded, the new arrow turns OFF;
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
The next direction of the arrow is use for reserved plants in particular in plants duplex, triplex and quadruplex.
n
li
w
The display of the arrow only appears on the floor where he stopped the car.
.u
.c
p-
w
Turns on at the beginning of the slowdown and turns off at the end of the closing doors of the
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
next departure.
p-
ft
w
51
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
w
lif
.u
It’s possible to have this signalling in 2 ways:
.c
w
p-
• In parallel
t
lif
n
w
.u
.c
p-
through external circuitry (see diagram below)
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
-li
w +
Next direction
w
w
ft
w
floor n°
-li
w
Legend:
.u
.c
FS= Up arrow
p
w
ft
n
FD= Down arrow
n
.u
.c
RFS= Relay up arrow
-li
w +
.c
ft
w
p
ft
-li
w
.u
P0,P1,Pn°=Position n°
.c
-li
p
w
ft
n
p
.u
Next direction
.c
-li
w +
.u
.c
floor 1
ft
w
p
w
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
p
.u
-li
w
.u
+
t.c
w
w
p
w
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
Next direction
p
w
w
CAR
p
f
floor 0
n
.u
-li
w +
.u
t.c
w
w
p
KG
w
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
w
w
f
RFS
n
-li
w
.u
+
t.c
A1 A1
w
p
w
1N4007
1N4007
n
RFS RFD RFD
f
FS FD
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
A2 A2
t.c
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
n
up
P0 P1 Pn°
f
FS FD +12
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
Position floor n°
Position floor 0
Position floor 1
w
w
f
n
-li
CONTROL BOARD w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
p
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
w
w
p
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
In serial:
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
w
.u
You can activate the next direction of the arrow in the display serial:
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
ICARO_DSR_D00
w
w
ft
.c
li
w
w
Set the number of floor for each display (32 = function off)
p-
ft
w
.c
.
p-
w
For more information on programming see manual display LCD600/601
w
w
ft
w
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
w
p-
ft
w
ift
.c
p-
Set the number of floor for each display (32 = function off)
w
w
ft
.u
.c
li
w
.c
p-
ft
w
ft
.c
li
p-
w
p-
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
w
p-
w
p-
ft
LCD4001: It’s possible to program the floor where the display is mounted by means of dip-
n
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
switch.Off, Off, Off, Off, Off, On = First floor). To active the arrow next direction you need to set the
w
w
w
ft
.c
li
w
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
52
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
VEG800 (dip switch) / ITF801
w
lif
.u
It can be connected to the outputs of a bright Veg800 (version with the dip-switch) or ITF801 to operate the arrow next
.c
w
p-
t
direction.
lif
n
w
If you also use the calls to the plans must need another serial VEG800/ITF800
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
Program the on-floor or ITF800 Veg800 serial devices (see Section 9.4 for programming)
-li
w
w
w
ft
The ITF801 always work as arrow next direction, you just program the floor,
w
-li
w
on VEG800 you can enable this feature by configuring the number of floor with the DIP-switch with
.u
.c
p
6 = ON. See diagram below.
ft
n
n
.u
.c
-li
w
- Veg 800(with jumper)
.c
Control board
ft
w
p
-Veg 800 (with dip-switch)
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
-ITF800
p
w
ft
n
p
.u
.c
-li
w
.u
.c
ft
w
p
w
ft
n
20 CEX
DIP SWITCH
-li
w
.u
CL
.c
20
-li
w
w
L1 KE Es.Floor 1
p
w
ft
p
1 CL
n
.u
1=ON
-li
w
.u
.c
w
w
CEX
p
20 DIP- switch
w
w
lif
CL ON 20
.u
p-n°
t.c
w
L0 KE
p
1 2 3 4 5 6
w
0 CL
w
FLOOR
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
w
20 CEX
w
DIP SWITCH
w
CL 20
w
f
n
L1 KE Es. Floor 1
-li
w
.u
t.c
1 CL
1,6= ON Active the next arrow
w
p
w
n
f
n
.u
CEX directione mode at floor 1
t.c
20 DIP- switch
-li
w
t.c
w
CL ON 20
w
w
KE
p
L0
f
n
-li
1 2 3 4 5 6
w
f
0 CL
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
n
up
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-ITF801 device
-li
p
w
p
f
n
.u
8.3CAR LIGHTING
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
w
w
p
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
w
p
.u
li
w
.u
.c
light can turn ON or OFF together with reserved signal. In this case a relay has to be connected to OCC output and
p-
w
w
w
ft
.c
li
w
light can turn OFF after a time higher than reserved signal time through one of the general TIMER (e.g. using
w
p-
ft
w
TMR3, a relay connected to CPF output to manage the light and with FS3 input activation with reserved signal)
n
li
w
.u
8.4LIGHTS
.c
.
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
n
.u
.c
li
w
Car and landing lights have many different meaning depending on plant type:
.c
w
p-
ft
w
ift
.c
p-
ft
.u
.c
li
w
.c
ft
w
ft
.c
li
p-
ft
.u
.c
li
w
.u
.c
ft
w
w
ft
.c
li
w
p-
ft
8.5RESERVED SIGNAL
n
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
.c
li
w
p-
li
w
entering in the car (when CCO is close) and even when there are over load or full load
.u
.c
p-
w
ft
n
.u
p-
ft
w
53
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
during control board programming (PRESET enabling)
w
lif
.u
during plant HALT
.c
w
p-
t
The reserved signal turns OFF after a TOC time (programmable from ‘0’ to ‘99’ tenths of second at add. 24) from the
lif
n
w
.u
.c
p-
end of last service.
w
w
w
ft
n
8.6SKIPPING THE FLOOR INDICATION ON SERIAL DISPLAY
w
.u
.c
-li
w
w
w
ft
w
p
In systems where there is a floor with no stops it possible to skip the indication of that floor in the serial display. To
-li
w
.u
.c
enable this function it is necessary to program the number of the floor to skip floor plus 50 (considering always the lower
p
w
ft
n
floor as floor number 0) at address 39 (NPM) and add 1 to the value programmed ad address 33 (NS).For example, if we
n
.u
.c
-li
w
have a system with 6 floors (position from 0 to 5) but without stops at floor 3 (counted always starting from 0), it is
.c
ft
w
p
ft
possible to skip the visualization of the floor position in the serial display, passing from position 2 to 4 in up direction and
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
from position 4 to 2 in down direction, programming the value 53 (3 + 50) at add. 39 and the value 11 (10 + 1) at add. 33.
p
w
ft
n
p
NOTE 1: if this function is enabled it’s not possible use the fire service operation
n
.u
.c
-li
w
.u
.c
ft
w
p
w
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
p
.u
-li
w
NOTA 2: This function has no effect on the display LCDXX, you can change the
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
n
characters directly on the display (on the menu).
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
p
w
w
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
.u
t.c
p
w
n
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
n
up
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
p
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
w
w
p
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
w
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
.
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
w
p-
ft
w
ift
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
p-
ft
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
p-
w
p-
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
w
p-
w
p-
ft
n
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
54
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
9.
w
w
w
lif
.u
.c
OPERATIONS
w
p-
t
lif
n
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
9.1AUTOMATIC RELEVELLING
.c
-li
w
w
w
ft
w
n
It’s a manoeuvre that permits an accuracy levelling of car when this one is stopped at landing:
-li
w
.u
.c
p
w
ft
n
if IF signal is deactivated while ICV is not yet, TS contactor is activated
n
.u
.c
-li
w
if ICV signal is deactivated while IF is not yet, TD contactor is activated.
.c
ft
w
p
ft
n
If this manoeuvre’s duration is greater then RIP programmable time (add. 30), plant is blocked permanently with fault
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
code ‘82’.
p
w
ft
n
p
.u
.c
-li
w
.u
.c
Relevelling is enabled both with close doors (programming ‘16’at the add. 62 ) and with open doors (CS open)
ft
w
p
w
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
p
.u
-li
w
Plant is blocked for the occurrence of fault ‘82’
.u
t.c
w
w
p
Plant is blocked for the occurrence of fault ‘83’
w
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
p
w
w
f
n
.u
-li
w
CS1 input signal kept opened (when safety circuit is enabled, do not programming value ‘+4’ at address 62)
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
If APA input controls relevelling operations (‘+8’ at add. 62) but it is opened, that is the car is out of relevelling zone.
-li
w
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
9.2EMERGENCY SERVICE MODE
.u
t.c
p
w
n
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
It is activated when there is a power cut. It is suited both for rope and hydraulic plants.
t.c
w
w
w
Operation begins when EM input is closed to GND and avoiding the control board power off (wiring a battery to BAT
p
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
connector). This operation works both in hydraulic plant and in rope plant.
t.c
-li
p
w
n
up
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
In rope systems, programming the value ‘98’ at address 31, the stop delay (TRIF) is disabled during Emergency
p
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
Manoeuvre.
w
w
p
w
f
FS3 change’s control is disabled.
n
-li
w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
w
p
.u
li
w
.u
all displays are switched off except for the car’s one.
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
The Alarms for the serial communications are disabled: Alarm ’62 and Alarm ‘63’. w
.u
.c
li
w
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
Doors checking are deactivated: fault ‘50’, ‘61’, ‘48’ and ‘49’.
.
p-
w
w
w
ft
When EM is released, after the car has finished the current action, emergency service mode is disabled. w
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
w
p-
ft
w
ift
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
PPE = 32 the car carry out a synchronising operation excluding sensors controls, goes to the landing 0 until RD
.c
p-
ft
w
ft
synchronising sensors; then it stops and commands the opening of the main entrance for all the busy signal time.
li
w
.u
.c
li
p-
w
p-
ft
n
n
.u
.c
p-
o
ft
If the car is halted at an upper level of PPE, reaches it with a regular stop;
w
w
ft
li
w
o If the car is out of floor, under PPE floor, reaches the lower level and opens the doors.
.u
.c
li
w
p-
w
p-
ft
PPE < 32 and PPE > plant’s number of stops the car goes down, stops at the nearest floor and opens the doors.
n
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
Indipending on PPE value, during the emergency service mode, the RE-LEVELLING is always deactivated.
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.c
p-
w
w
ft
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
55
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
PPE = 32 the car goes down, stops at the first IF and commands the doors opening for the busy signal time. In
w
w
lif
.u
.c
the rope plants at 2 speed TG is commanded instead TP.
w
p-
t
PPE = 31 will be enabled the emergency operation with the search for the optimum direction of motion. The
lif
w
.u
.c
p-
w
operation is described below:
w
w
ft
w
.u
If the EM input is activated when the car is moving and the ALT signal is not interrupted, the car continues to
.c
-li
w
w
w
ft
w
move (until reaches the first floor that meets) in the same direction in which it was already moving;
-li
w
If the ALT signal is interrupted (this will cause the stop of the car) before the activation of the EM input, the
.u
.c
p
w
control board activates the search for the optimum direction of motion. When the ALT signal comes back, thje
ft
n
n
.u
.c
-li
w
control board try to move the car in one of the two directions and at each interruption and return of ALT signal
.c
ft
w
the control board reverses the direction in which attempts to move the car.. To interrupt the ALT signal to search
p
ft
-li
w
.u
for the optimum direction of motion it is necessary to connect a control contact of the emergency device in serie
.c
-li
p
w
ft
s to ALT input. So the ALT input is interrupted if there is an overload of the emergency device (the overload
n
p
.u
.c
-li
w
occurs when the car moves in the unfavourable direction).
.u
.c
ft
w
p
w
ft
n
Can be programmed a waiting time for a new attempt after the interruption and return of ALT signal. This waiting
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
p
If the car never reaches the floor when moving in one direction, the control board stops the operation after a timeout
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
time programmable at address 27 even if the ALT signal was not interrupted, and after the time programmed at
w
w
p
w
n
address 30 makes a new attempt in the opposite direction.
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
p
PPE < 31 and PPE < plant’s number of stops:
w
w
f
n
.u
-li
o If the car is in stop zone, opens the doors; w
.u
t.c
w
w
o If the car is halted at an upper level of PPE, reaches it with a regular stop;
p
w
w
f
cn
.u
o If the car is out of floor, under PPE floor, reaches the lower level and opens the doors.
t.c
-li
w
w
w
w
PPE < 31 and PPE > plant’s number of stops the car goes down, stops at the nearest floor and opens the doors.
f
n
-li
w
.u
t.c
p
During the emergency service mode, the synchronising contactors are always deactivated and the low speed is forced.
w
n
f
n
.u
9.3PLATFORM MANAGEMENT
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
w
f
n
To enable platform management or the “Man Present” call managment, must be programmed the value ‘2’ at address 63
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
and wire separately landing calls and car calls (like a down collective plant) .
p
w
n
up
f
n
.u
For the correct working of platform lifts with ‘Man Present’ Mode you must enable the multiplexing of the call’s inputs
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
adding value '+64' at address 61.
w
f
n
-li
w
f
t.c
-li
p
w
Car runs only if call button (car or landing ones) is kept pressed
p
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
All landing buttons are ignored when car runs for a car call
t.c
t.
w
w
When car is busy for an external call, other landing calls are ignored until the corresponding call button is pressed. If
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
the current call button is released, car is still reserved for this call until car reserved signal is active, but car stops
w
p
w
ft
w
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
The control board is able to manage variations of these operations. In fact, if the third entrance is not enabled (‘0’ at add.
w
w
w
ft
3), INT input signal is the activation command of this service mode in this way: w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
If INT is always connected to GND: car and landing calls are managed like single call plant’s ones
n
li
w
.u
If INT is connected to GND when car is not reserved: car calls are served like “man-present” service’s ones and
.c
.
p-
w
w
w
landing calls are served like automatic single call system’s ones. To connect INT to GND when car is not reserved, it
ft
w
n
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
p-
w
w
ft
To the AP2 output signal, that is, in this condition, active (closed to GND) when plant is not reserved or when
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
If INT input is always open: car and landing calls are managed like “man-present” service’s ones.
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
p-
w
p-
ft
.u
.c
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
In case of elevating platform powered by an electric winch controlled by VVVF you need to:
w
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
w
p-
w
ft
n
.u
Programming at address 25 (TST time) a value greather than 70, it is possibile to delay (delay = (TST – 70)
li
w
.u
.c
p-
tenths of a second) the disactivation of contactors (TP output) compared to the commands of the VVVF (TS and
w
w
ft
TD outputs) to allow the ramp for the stop. Otherwise can be used the Stop Delay (TRIF) as for the rope
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
systems. With this functions it is possible to have a soft stop (the stops is completed with the ramp of the VVVF
w
ft
w
.c
p-
At address 1 it is possibile to choose if you want a one speed system or a two speed system.
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
56
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
MANAGMENT OF THE SAFETY CIRCUIT.
w
lif
.u
At address 31 program the value ‘98’. So the RU output is used to enable the safety circuit to bypass the locks
.c
w
p-
t
of the external door at the landing. With this set up the timer TMR1 is not available.
lif
n
w
At address 62 add the value ‘+8’ to enable the APA input. Moreover can be enabled the check of the safety
.u
.c
p-
w
w
circuit on input CS1 adding the value ‘+4’ at address 62.
ft
w
.u
.c
-li
w
w
w
ft
w
p
9.4REDUCED HEADROOM AND PIT MANAGMENT.
-li
w
.u
.c
p
w
ft
n
When a building has realization problems related to lack of space or special structural and regulatory constraints, you can
n
.u
.c
-li
w
install special equipment made in accordance with local rules,
.c
ft
w
p
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
p
w
ft
n
p
.u
.c
-li
w
.u
.c
ft
w
p
w
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
p
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
p
w
w
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
.u
t.c
p
w
n
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
n
up
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
p
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.
w
w
w
f
You can move the car with PSM and PDM maintenance buttons
n
-li
w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
Press the Stop button (in the pit or in the head) and insert the safety stakes
w
p
w
ft
w
.u
li
w
.u
p-
w
w
w
ft
Exit the maintenance mode and enter the "normal". The board will show the code "88";
n
w
.u
.c
li
w
To reset the system press the SPEEDY button for 3 seconds at least
w
p-
ft
9.5PRIORITY CALL
w
li
w
.u
.c
.
p-
w
w
w
A priority call can be made from one of the floors by closing the external key on that floor. You can make a priority call
ft
w
n
.u
from all floors by reusing the same input “INT” used for the “internal mode” and you can activated it following the same
.c
li
w
.c
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
-You program “0” in address 3, otherwise “INT” is the door photodetector for third entrance:
.u
.c
p-
w
-“Man present mode” is not activated by not programming +2 in address 63 throught a proper wiring, as showed in the
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
picture below.
.c
p-
ft
w
After a priority call all previous calls are deleted, the open doors parking with close door activated and every type of
ft
li
w
.u
p-
w
p-
The first priority call excludes all the others that follow.
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
p-
ft
If the car is going in an opposite direction of the first floor where the call has been made and then it moves towards
w
w
ft
li
w
.u
p-
w
p-
If the car is stationary, it immediately moves towards the priority call floor when the car reaches the priority call
w
ft
n
.u
li
w
floor, you can close the internal key and move the car with an internal mode after removing the external key. In this
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
w
.u
w
p-
ft
1) Use the fire service mode to manage a priority call from 1 floor
w
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
57
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
w
lif
.u
Control Board
.c
GND CL
w
p-
t
lif
12 13 14 15 16 17 1 3 9 2 8 10 INT
n
5 7 4 6
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
-li
w C/ L 0 C/ L 1 C/ L 2 C/ L 3 C/ L 4 C/ L 5 S/ L 0 S/ L 1 S/ L 2 S/ L 3 S/ L 4 D/ L 1 D/ L 2 D/ L 3 D/ L 4 D/ L 5
w
w
ft
w
-li
w
.u
.c
w
EXTERNAL EXTERNAL
p
w
ft
n
UP DOWN
n
.u
.c
-li
w INTERNAL CALL CALL CALL
.c
ft
w
p
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
p
w
ft
n
p
.u
.c
-li
w
.u
.c
ft
w
p
w
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
UP/DOWN
p
w
ft
p
COLLECTIVE
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
WIRING
w
w
p
w
n
Internal Key to Key to Key to
w
f
.u
Key floor 0 floor 1 floor 2 floor 3 floor 4 floor 5
t.c
-li
w
w
9.6INTERNAL MODE
p
w
w
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
This operation is enabled closing INT input signal to GND after programming ‘0’ at address 3 and if “man-present”
w
w
p
w
n
service is disabled (not programming ‘+2’ at add. 63).
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
This activation causes these actions:
w
w
f
n
-li
cancellation of all reservations (car one and landing one); w
.u
t.c
p
the car remains reserved with open doors;
w
n
f
n
.u
t.c
accept a car calls at a time.
-li
w
t.c
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
9.7MOUNTING OPERATION
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
n
up
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
To enable inspection mode during plant mounting phase, it is necessary to connect RS and RD connectors to GND and to
t.c
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
ùEnter in Inspection service mode and so press the PSM push button to go up or PDM to go down.
t.c
-li
p
w
The car speed in inspection mode will be the one programmed at address 4.
p
f
n
.u
-li
w
NOTE: CAR DO NOT STOP at extreme landing if you keep pressed the push button becouse synchronising sensors are
.u
t.c
t.
w
w
not there.
p
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
w
.u
Inspection mode is activated when MAN input signal is connected to GND or moving the switch present on the
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
programming keypad DISP900 in MAN position. If the inspection mode is activated through the switch of the
w
w
ft
w
.u
programming keypad, is possible to move the car with the buttons UP (to move the car in up direction) and DW (to move
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
NOTE: The inspection mode activated through the inspection panel on the roof of the car (activated on MAN Input) is
li
w
.u
.c
.
p-
w
w
prioritary compared with the inspection mode activated through the switch of the programming keypad DISP900. So if
w
ft
w
n
.u
the MAN input is active, it is not possibile to move the car in Inspection Mode using the buttons UP and DW of the
.c
li
w
.c
w
p-
ft
w
ift
li
w
At the address 62 MAN input can be programmed normally closed (‘+1’ => the Inspection Mode is active when the
.u
.c
p-
MAN input is open) or normally open (do not program ‘+1’ => the Inspection Mode is active when the MAN input is
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
closed).
.c
li
w
.c
p-
ft
w
ft
li
w
.u
p-
w
p-
Car can move only keeping pressed the PDM (down direction run) or PSM (up direction run) button placed on the car
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.u
roof. Pressing at the same time these two buttons, car is stopped. Buttons are enabled after RITING programmable
.c
p-
ft
w
w
time (add.45) since the car stopping, that is when contactors trip and buttons are released;
ft
li
w
.u
Door closing is activated after the PDM or PSM pressure if photosensor, PAP, car load complete and ALT signals are
.c
li
w
p-
w
p-
ft
inactive. When inspection service is deactivated, doors are opened if car is at the landing.
n
.u
li
w
Car can run at high speed (‘0’ or ‘2’ at add. 4) or low speed ( ‘1’ or ‘3’at add. 4) and it can stop (also when PDM or
.u
.c
p-
w
w
PSM buttons are pressed) on synchronizing sensors (‘0’ or ‘1’ at add. 4) or at the extreme floor on IF sensor (‘2’ or
w
ft
w
.u
w
p-
ft
li
w
.u
.c
The Alarms for the serial communications: Alarm ’62 and Alarm ‘63’.
p-
w
w
ft
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
58
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
High speed, in inspection mode car can move only at running speed V1P;
w
lif
.u
Resrved car sensor (presence in car sensor or MOVABLE PLATFORM);
.c
w
p-
t
relevelling;
lif
n
w
emergency service;
.u
.c
p-
w
w
door pre-opening;
ft
w
.u
FS3 change’s checking;
.c
-li
w
w
w
ft
w
p
At the end of inspection service mode, after the operator had left the car roof and the door had been closed, the car
-li
w
.u
.c
stands until a new call is made (a car call or a landing call).
p
w
ft
n
n
.u
NOTE: If plant has 3 speeds with immediate halt (programming ‘4’ or ‘12’ at add. 5), when the first call is done,
.c
-li
w
.c
w
automatic car call at an extreme landing is activated to avoid wrong floors’ count.
ft
w
p
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
p
9.8.1 Hand operation
w
ft
n
p
.u
.c
-li
w
.u
.c
Activating MAN and CCS together, car is moved to the nearest floor in low speed, with PDM/PSM push buttons. Car is
ft
w
p
w
ft
n
stopped even if the push button remains active. Once car is stopped, doors are opened.
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
9.9SYNCRONIZING/PHASING
p
w
ft
p
.u
-li
w
.u
After an outage, the system has to synchronize itself, except if car is already at an extreme landing. It is possible to
t.c
w
w
p
choose the extreme landing where to go at add. 19. If there is a car sensor faulty (sensor doesn’t open at extreme
w
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
p
w
Phasing can start automatically, that is without pressing any call’s push buttons (‘0’ or ‘4’ at the add. 13) or manually,
w
f
n
.u
-li
w
that is after pressing a call push button (‘8’ or ‘12’ at add. 13). When there are manual doors it is necessary to program
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
In an hydraulic system, if the car is stopped at landing ‘zero’ out of floor but in RD zone, at power on, car goes up until
-li
w
w
w
it leaves the synchronizing sensor and then it goes back to landing ‘zero’. If you have programmed parking with close
w
f
n
-li
w
.u
p
9.10 FIRE SERVICE
w
n
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
w
There are two operating mode: FIRE SERVICE mode and FIREFIGHTERS SERVICE mode.
p
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
n
up
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
This operation is enabled only when parameter at address 39 (NPM) is set at a value < ’32’.
t.c
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
In order to activate this service mode, it is possible use one of these input signals:
w
p
w
p
f
n
.u
FS3, programming ‘96’, ‘97’ or ‘98’ at address 29 (CHF);
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
w
PCP, otherwise (when FS3 is used for other function and if PCP is not used yet for doors closing push button).
w
p
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
w
.u
li
w
.c
p-
w
w
ft
w
.u
An automatic call to NPM landing (add.39) is done after the end of the call in progress, to avoid sudden car u-
.c
li
w
w
p-
turn.
ft
w
li
w
.c
.
p-
w
w
ft
w
n
.u
w
p-
w
ft
If is used the FS3 input:An elevator that runs from the designated floor, it stops on the first floor as possible,
w
ift
li
w
reverse direction and go without opening the doors to floor designated NPM (add.39).
.u
.c
p-
w
If is used the PCP input: An elevator that runs from the designated floor, complete the run, open and close the
w
ft
n
n
.u
p-
w
ft
With FS3 input:An elevator in moving in direction of the designated floor ,continues without stopping, until at
w
ft
li
w
floor designed.
.u
.c
li
p-
w
With PCP input: An elevator in moving in direction of the designated floor , complete the run, open and close the
p-
ft
n
n
.u
.c
p-
w
ft
ft
li
w
When the car arrives to the designated floor, must remain in parking with automatic
.u
.c
li
w
p-
w
p-
ft
n
.u
The manual doors must be unlocked and the elevator must be removed rom the normal working.
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
To enable firefighters service mode CHF parameter (add.29) has to be programmed with ‘96’ value.
n
li
w
.u
This operation is enabled only when parameter at address 39 (NPM) is set at a value < ’32’.
.c
p-
w
If NPM = 32 or CHF is different from ‘96’, firefighters service mode is always disabled.
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
59
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
In accordance with EN 81 –72 July 2003 – 72 part STANDARDS, this operation is divided into 2 phases: the first one
w
lif
.u
guarantees the shorter time for the car to reach the NPM floor (in case of FIRE) to be used from firefighters; the second
.c
w
p-
t
one manages the car when car is under firefighters control.
lif
n
w
Setting CHF = ‘96’:
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
n
Activation of forced closing and alarm horn on CPF output.
w
.u
.c
-li
w
FS3 is used like Phase 1 activation command: ‘priority recall for the firefighters lift’. (fire service mode)
w
w
ft
w
p
FS3 + INT are used like Phase 2 activation commands: ‘use of the lift under firefighters control’. (firefighters
-li
w
.u
.c
service mode)
p
w
ft
n
Check of the second key in car with INT input.
n
.u
.c
-li
w
.c
ft
w
p
ft
n
The operation mode can be resumed with the following points:
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
Fire service mode is used for Phase 1 to guarantee the priority recall for firefighters landing (in this case is fire-
p
w
ft
n
p
.u
.c
fighting). If car is running in opposite direction in respect to the firefighters floor, it is stopped at first floor that it
-li
w
.u
.c
w
founds, don’t open the doors and then leaves for firefighters landing, otherwise reaches the firefighters landing
ft
w
p
w
ft
-li
w
.u
without intermediate stops.
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
If the car is standing with open doors at a parking floor different from firefighters floor, or if doors are halted, when
p
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
firefighters service mode is activated, after 2 minutes that doors remains open, a forced closing will be activated.
w
w
p
w
n
When the door is closed, the car will leave for firefighters landing.
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
Phase 2, car is under control of firefighters; This phase is activated just at firefighters landing arrival and when INT
p
w
w
f
n
.u
-li
w
and CEP (FS3 connector) are active. Phase 2 needs a particular firefighter lift switches management as described
.u
t.c
w
w
below:
p
w
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
.u
t.c
CEP
INT
w
p
w
n
External switch
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
(at fire-fighting
t.c
w
(optional in car)
w
w
landing)
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
n
up
at
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
p
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
1 0 Internal mode.
w
w
p
w
f
n
-li
w
Standard fire-fighting mode
f
.u
.c
-li
w
w
1 1 (man present doors opening),
p
w
ft
w
.u
closed doors parking
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
If internal key is disabled, system is blocked with open doors , otherwise if this key is set at ‘1’, system works in
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
The second key (the one in the car) is optional, so there are system with only one key. In this case will be necessary
.u
.c
.
p-
w
w
to connect together FS3 and INT, so 00 and 11 will be the only possible combinations.
w
ft
w
n
.u
.c
Once arrived at desired landing, doors remain closed. Only with a constant pressure of PAP push-button doors are
li
w
.c
w
p-
ft
opened, but if the push button is left before the complete doors opening, doors will close. When doors are
w
ift
li
w
completely open, they remains open until a new car’s call is made.
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
p-
ft
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
p-
Control board
w
p-
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
w
ft
li
w
.c
li
w
p-
w
p-
ft
n
.u
Internal
li
w
.u
.c
key
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
Fireman external
w
ft
w
key (CEP)
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
60
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
9.11 AMENDAMENT A3
w
lif
.u
.c
w
p-
w
In accordance with EN81-1/2:1998 + A3:2009 and EN81-21 as of January 2012 all new lifts must be equipped
t
lif
n
w
.u
with a safety device to stop unintended car movement away from the landing with the landing door not in the
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
locked position and the car door not in the closed position.
w
.u
.c
-li
w
Rope elevator (Programming “0” or “32” at address 6)
w
w
ft
w
p
A3 Function is active programming “+64” at address 63
-li
w
.u
.c
Application diagram
p
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
-li
w
.c
ft
w
p
ft
-li
w
.u
.c AUX1
-li
BRAKE-MICRO 1
p
w
ft
n
p
.u
Control board
.c
-li
w BRAKE-MICRO 2
.u
AUX2
.c
ft
w
p
w
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
GND
p
w
ft
p
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
The correct control of the brakes is done by connecting a normally closed contact of the brakes on the
p
w
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
p
w
w
Both inputs must be closed with elevator stopped, while both are open when it moves.
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
The control use programmable delays at address “45” (on inputs AUX1, AUX2) and at address “44” (delay
w
w
p
w
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
w
If the contacts of the brakes don't open on the run, the fault is generated only after the stop.
w
f
n
-li
w
If, after the stop, both brakes don’t close, the opening of doors is no enabled.
.u
t.c
p
w
The fault is different for the two brakes: “86 failure for the brake connected at input AUX1 and “87” failure
n
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
n
up
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
p
f
n
.u
x
-li
w
.u
AUX1
BRAKE-MICRO 1
t.c
t.
AUX1
BRAKE-MICRO 1
w
w
p
w
f
“FAULT 86"
x
n
BRAKE-MICRO 2
CONTROL CONTROL
-li
w
“FAULT 87"
AUX2
f
.u
BRAKE-MICRO 2
AUX2
.c
BOARD
-li
w
BOARD
w
p
w
ft
w
GND
p
.u
GND
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
1A w
.u
1B
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
.
1A-Disconnect from the control board the contact MICRO 1 of the brake (AUX1 input) and verify that on the
p-
w
w
w
ft
.u
.c
li
w
1B-Disconnect from the control board the contact MICRO 2 of the brake (AUX2 input) and verify that on the
.c
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
p-
ft
w
ft
li
w
AUX1
.u
BRAKE-MICRO 1
.c
li
AUX1
p-
w
p-
“FAULT 86"
BRAKE-MICRO 2
w
ft
CONTOL CONTROL
“FAULT 87"
AUX2
n
.u
BOARD
AUX2
BOARD
.c
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
GND
w
ft
GND
n
li
w
.u
.c
li
w
p-
w
p-
ft
2A 2B
n
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
2A-connect the input relative to the MICRO 1 contact of the brake (AUX1 input) to "GND", move the elevator
.c
li
w
w
p-
and check that on the display of the control board is signaled the fault "86";
w
ft
w
li
2B-connect the input relative to the MICRO 2 contact of the brake (AUX2 Input") to "GND", move the elevator
w
.u
.c
p-
and check that on the display of the control board is signaled the fault “87".
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
61
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
HYDRAULIC LIFT (programming "16" or "48" at the address 6);
w
lif
.u
A3 Function is active programming at the address 63 the value “+64”
.c
w
p-
t
lif
n
IM
w
VM
.u
.c
p-
w
w
CONTROL BOARD
ft
w
.u
.c
TP
-li
w
w
GND TSD TS TD TP VIM D OM
ft
w
n
+
-li
w
.u
.c
VP
p
w
TS KDA3
ft
n
KDA3 TG TD TDA3
n
.u
.c
-li
w
.c
ft
w
p
ft
n
TD TS TD TP
-li
w
VG VD VDA3
.u
.c
-li
p
w
ft
n
p
.u
.c
OM
-li
w
.u
.c
ft
w
p
w
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
The D output of the control board commands a new contactor, KDA3, that feeds the second descent
p
w
ft
valve. This valve is piloted by the contacts of the new contactor, in series with the contacts of the run main
p
.u
-li
w
.u
w
w
p
w
The state off of the KDA3 contactor is controlled by the normal TSD input together with the state of
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
p
w
• The valve VDA3:
w
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
w
w
p
o Is activated together with the VD valve at every start for a downward run or a down relevelling.
w
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
• At power on, after rephasing (back at the lowest floor) and after that the busy signal goes off (about 5
-li
w
w
w
w
seconds), the board immediately executes the control of the valve. The control is done only at the lowest floor.
p
f
n
-li
w
• Before enabling the valves, the board checks that the elevator is correctly stopped at the floor and that
.u
t.c
p
w
contacts connected on APG CPP and TSD input are closed (normally closed).
n
f
n
.u
t.c
• First is commanded the descent valve (TD) by controlling the holding of the auxiliary contactor (D), then the
-li
w
t.c
w
w
w
board activates the auxiliary contactor (D) by controlling the holding of the descent valve (TD).
p
f
n
-li
w
f
t.c
-li
p
w
n
up
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
w
o Deferring it, if the control board enters in programming mode or fault is active, or with the
p
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
activation of one or more of the following inputs: EM, EXC, ALT, MAN and PAP.
-li
p
w
• If the check fails (exiting by the stop zone) is rerun after a re-leveling (wait 10 seconds) and, if the check fails
p
f
n
.u
-li
w
again, the board goes to block signaling fault “86” if the check of the TD output fails (when testing the A3
.u
t.c
t.
w
w
auxiliary valve test) or fault 87 if the check of the D output fails (when testing VD descent valve).
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
• Once you have executed correctly and without error the checks of the valves, the test will be disabled for at
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
w
least 16 hours. After that time, if the elevator is already at the lowest stop level, the test is triggered, otherwise,
p
.u
li
w
.u
after 24 hours is forced a call at the lowest floor and the check is run.
.c
p-
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
1. Turn on and off the power of the control board to start the auto-test;
.c
.
p-
w
w
ft
w
n
.u
.c
li
w
3. Make sure that, first the VD valve activates (TD output) and after about 10 seconds the VD valve goes
.c
w
p-
ft
w
off and VDA3 valve activates (D output ).The procedure must be terminated without failure;
ift
li
w
.u
4. Repeat step 1:
.c
p-
w
w
a) On activation of the valve VD (output TD) simulate the failure of VDA3 valve (output D),
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
manually opening the VDA3 valve (causing the exit from the floor zone);
.c
p-
ft
w
b) The elevator will start in down direction, just exiting from the stop zone is executed a re-
ft
li
w
.u
leveling;
.c
li
p-
w
p-
c) Reopen manually VDA3 valve (causing a new exit from the floor zone);
ft
n
n
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
e) The board is blocked, press the SPEEDY for at least 2 seconds to unlock it
w
ft
li
w
.u
5. Repeat step 1.
.c
li
w
p-
w
p-
a) On activation of the valve VDA3 (output D) simulate the failure of VD valve (output TD),
ft
n
.u
li
w
manually opening the VD valve (causing the exit from the floor zone).
.u
.c
p-
w
w
b) The elevator will start in down direction, just exiting from the stop zone is executed
w
ft
w
.u
a re-leveling;
.c
li
w
w
p-
li
w
.c
p-
w
e) The board is blocked, press the SPEEDY for at least 2 seconds to unlock it.
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
62
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
10.
w
w
w
lif
.u
.c
SERIAL EXPANSIONS
w
p-
t
lif
n
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
10.1 WIRINGS
.c
-li
w
w
w
ft
w
-li
w
In order to minimize noise and interferences on communication between control board and serial board, it is important to
.u
.c
w
assign the 4 wires of the multipole falt cable as shown in the figure below.
p
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
-li
w
.c
ft
w
p
1 2 3 4 16 1 13 14 15 16
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
p
w
ft
n
p
.u
.c
-li
w
.u
.c
w
K 2 C C
ft
C C 2 K
w
p
w
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
I 0 I L
-li
w
L I 0 I
p
w
ft
p
N
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
p
w
w
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
.u
t.c
p
w
n
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
w
f
n
OTHERWISE
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
n
up
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
p
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
w
w
p
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
w
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
.
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
w
p-
ft
w
ift
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
p-
ft
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
p-
w
p-
It is also good to keep the wires that carry the power supply and the commands to the door operator on the others side of
w
ft
n
n
.u
the falt cable compared to the wires that carry serial communication, especially in the case of operators doors at 380 Vac.
.c
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
In these cases (with 380Vac door operators) it is appropriate to take precautions with special filtering to prevent
w
w
ft
li
w
disturbance to the serial communication between the control board and the peripheral boards.
.u
.c
li
w
p-
w
p-
ft
n
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
63
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
Serial Display
w
lif
.u
.c
w
p-
t
lif
n
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
-li
w
w
w
ft
TFT 5.7” SERCAR_LCD2.4/ LCD601 ICARO_DSR
w
SERCAR_LCD2.4_03 LCD600 FLOORDIS
n
SERCAR SCREEN
-li
w
.u
.c
LCD4001
p
w
ft
n
Car
n
.u
.c
-li
w
.c
ft
w
TFT 5.7”-TFT210
p
Signalling LCD600-601 Sercar_lcd Lcd4001/Sercar_screen/
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
2.4 Icaro_DSR/Floordis
p
w
ft
n
“FS” “OUT OF SERVICE”
p
.u
.c
-li
w
.u
.c
icon icon
ft
w
p
“MA” “MA” “Manuteinance” icon
w
ft
MAINTENANCE MA
-li
w
.u
…
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
OVERLOAD “Overload” icon “SC”+(Icon+ SC “Overload” icon
p
.u
-li
w buzzer)
.u
t.c
w
“C” … … “Full load” icon
w
Full load
p
w
w
f
.u
ALARM ACTIVE
t.c
-li
w
w
“AR” “AR” … “Alarm receive” icon
p
w
ALARM RECEIVE
w
f
n
.u
FIREMAN “P” “P” … “Fireman” icon
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
PRIORITY CALL
w
p
w
n
…
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
Overload+ Emergeny icon
w
w
f
n
Buzzer
-li
w
.u
t.c
p
w
n
Floor
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
TFT 5.7”-TFT210
t.c
w
Signalling Sercar lcd_2.4/ LCD4001/ LCD600-601
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
Floordis
p
w
n
up
f
n
.u
OUT OF SERVICE “F” “F” OUT OF SERVICE “OUT OF SERVICE”
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
icon
w
f
n
-li
MAINTENANCE OUT OF SERVICEw
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
p
.u
-li
w
.u
OVERLOAD
t.
w
w
p
w
f
“C” “C” “Overload” icon “Full load” icon
n
Full load
-li
w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
ALLARM ACTIVE “A” “A” “alarm active” icon “Alarm active” icon
w
p
w
ft
ALLARM RECEIVE
p
.u
li
w
“P” “P”
.u
p-
w
w
PRIORITY CALL
ft
w
.u
… … …
.c
w
p-
ft
Emergeny icon
w
.c
.
p-
w
w
w
ft
The car’s serials are board with 24 digital inputs and 24 digital outputs. This boards can be connected on the same serial w
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
w
p-
channel (max 4 boards on the same channel) and can be distinguished assigning to each board a unique address. This
w
ft
w
ift
li
address can be assigned with the opportune bridge on the apposite Jumpers.
w
.u
.c
p-
To the car’s serials is possible to connect both the signals of the calls and the signals for the services. These signals are
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
p-
The number of serial boards needed to meet a given installation depends on the number of floors of the plant to achieve,
w
ft
w
ft
and on the signals you want to bring to the control board with the serial framework (only the calls’ signals or calls’
li
w
.u
.c
li
p-
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.u
.c
If the system has a number of stops less than 13, it is possibile to connect all the signals (calls’s one and services’s
p-
ft
w
w
ft
li
w
.c
li
w
p-
w
p-
ft
n
.u
If the system has a number of stops greather than 13 can be used two serial board depending on your needs:
li
w
.u
.c
If you need to use the serial framework only for the car’s calls, only a serial board is needed. Ref paragraph
p-
w
w
w
ft
10.1.3.
.u
.c
li
w
If you need to use the serial framework for both car’s calls and services’ signals, two serial board are nedeed.
w
p-
ft
w
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
64
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
w
lif
.u
10.2.1 Serial Board ITF400
.c
w
p-
t
lif
n
LAYOUT:
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
Diagnostic leds
.u
.c
-li
w Serial connector
w
+12V:=ON, Power on;
ft
w
n
(power supply + clock and data)
-li
w
+Vi:ON=5V internal;
.u
.c
w
KO: ON, shorted outputs (output to “+Vi”);
p
w
+Vi=Power supply 12/24Vdc (+)
ft
n
n
.u
GND=Power supply 12/24Vdc (-) MCU:Flashing slow (1 sec) serial wiring= OK
.c
-li
w
.c
w
CK=Serial clock (internal or external)
ft
Flashing fast, serial wiring incorrect or broken.
w
p
ft
n
DA=Serial data (internal or external)
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
p
w
ft
n
p
.u
GND
+Vi
.c
-li CK
DA
w
.u
.c
ft
MCU
w
+12V
p
KO
+Vi
w
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
w
O0 I0
p
w
ft
p
I1
n
.u
O1
-li
w
.u
t.c
O2 I2
w
w
p
w
n
O3 I3
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
O4 I4
p
w
w
f
I5
n
.u
O5
-li
w
.u
t.c
O6 I6
w
w
p
w
n
O7 I7
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
w
w
I8
p
O8
f
n
-li
w
.u
O9 I9
t.c
p
w
O10 I10
n
f
n
.u
OUTPUTS
t.c
I11
-li
w
O11 INPUTS
t.c
w
w
I12
w
O12
p
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
O13 I13
t.c
-li
p
I14
w
O14
n
up
f
n
.u
I15
t.c
-li
w
O15
t.c
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
I16
.u
O16
t.c
-li
w
I17
p
O17
w
p
f
n
.u
O18 I18
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
I19
w
O19
w
p
w
f
n
-li
I20 w
f
O20
.u
t.c
-li
w
w ENT
w
O21 I21
p
p-SEL
w
w
lif
n
.u
O22 I22
w
.u
.c
I23
w
O23
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
.
p-
w
Display + push-buttons
w
w
ft
w
n
.u
w
p-
ft
w
ift
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
Programming address:
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
p-
ft
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
p-
w
p-
ft
n
n
.u
ADDRESS:
.c
li
w
.u
.c
p-
0
ft
w
w
ft
SEL
li
w
.u
.c
li
w
SEL
p-
1
ENT
w
1
p-
ADDRESS
w
ENT
ft
n
.u
ASSIGNMENT SEL
li
w
.u
.c
2
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
SEL
li
w
3
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
65
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
w
lif
.u
.c
ITF400 CONNECTION WITH THE CONTROL BOARD (INTERNAL SERIAL):
w
p-
t
lif
n
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
n
CONTROL BOARD
w
.u
.c
-li
w Internal serial
w
NOTA:
ft
VIM KI GND DIN
w
n
In order to minimize noise and interferences on
-li
w
.u
.c
w
communication between control board and serial
p
w
ft
n
n
.u
board, it is important to assign the 4 wires of the
.c
-li
w
.c
ft
w
p
ft
-li
w
The GND must pass between the clock and data.
.u
.c
-li
p
w
ft
n
p
.u
.c
-li
w
GND
+Vi
DA
CK
.u
.c
ft
w
p
w
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
p
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
n
Example of connection up to 13 stops: ITF400 ADDRESS:
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
p
w
w
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
w
w
GND
p
+Vi
f
n
CK
DA
-li
w
.u
t.c
p
w
n
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
L0 C0
t.c
w
O0 I0
w
w
f
L1 C1
n
-li
O1 w
f
I1
.u
t.c
-li
L2 C2
w
p
O2
w
I2
n
up
C3
n
L3
.u
t.c
-li
w
O3 I3
t.c
w
w
L4 C4
p
f
O4
n
I4
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
L5 C5
O5
w
I5
p
w
p
L6 C6
f
n
.u
O6
-li
w
I6
.u
t.c
t.
L7 C7
w
w
O7
p
I7
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
p
L8
w
C8
ft
w
O8
p
I8
n
.u
li
w
L9
.u
C9
.c
O9
p-
I9
w
w
w
ft
L10
n
O10 C10/CCC w
I10
.u
.c
li
w
L11 C11/CCC/CM3
w
O11
p-
I11
ft
w
L12 C12/CCC/CM2
li
w
O12
.u
I12
.c
.
p-
w
w
w
CCS
ft
O13
A1
AP3
n
A2
I13 w
n
.u
.c
li
w
O14 MAN
CP3
A1
.c
A2
w
I14
p-
ft
w
ift
CCO
n
O15
AP2
A2
A1
li
w
I15
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
SAR/CP2
n
CM1
.u
.c
li
O16
w
I16
.c
p-
ft
PAP
w
O17
A1
I17
A2
AP
ft
li
w
.u
PSM
.c
li
O18
p-
I18
A1
A2
CP
w
p-
ft
PDM
OCC
O19 I19
A1
A2
.u
.c
li
w
.u
.c
GONG RS
p-
O20
w
I20
ft
w
-
+
w
ft
li
w
SNR (suoneria) RD
.u
O21 I21
.c
li
w
p-
-
+
ICV
p-
Freccia salita
w
ft
O22 I22
n
.u
li
w
IF
.u
Freccia discesa
O23
.c
I23
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
66
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
n
KI 0 1 2 ………………………………. 23
w
lif
.u
.c
Inputs
w
CONTROL
p-
t
lif
CK
n
BOARD
w
VEG400
.u
.c
p-
DIN DA
w
w
w
ft
w
Outputs
.u
.c
-li
w L0 L1 L2 ……………………………L23
w
w
ft
w
-li
w
.u
.c
INPUTS
w
NOTES
p
w
ft
n
SINGLE FULL COLLECTIVE
n
.u
.c
-li
w
.c
AUTOMATIC
ft
Cn = Car call button
w
p
ft
n
Inp. 1entr. 2entr. 3entr. 1entr. 2entr. 3entr.
-li
w
CCS,MAN,CCO,CM1,PAP,PSM,PDM,RS,RD,ICV,IF,
.u
.c
-li
0 C0 C0 C0 C0 C0 C0
w
CM2,CM3,CCC = Input signal wired directly to the serial
p
w
ft
n
1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1
p
.u
board.
.c
-li
w
.u
2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2
.c
ft
w
3 C3 C3 C3 C3 C3 C3
p
w
ft
-li
w
Note1: To enable car call button instead of CCC signal,
.u
4 C4 C4 C4 C4 C4 C4
.c
-li
w
w
5 C5 C5 C5 C5 C5 C5 program the parameter at address 38 and wire CCC signal
p
w
ft
p
.u
6 C6 C6 C6 C6 C6 C6 to the control board.
-li
w
.u
t.c
7 C7 C7 C7 C7 C7 C7
w
w
p
w
n
8 C8 C8 C8 C8 C8 C8
w
f
Note2:
.u
t.c
-li
w
9 C9 C9 C9 C9 C9 C9
w
In order to reduce complexity and lenght of site work,
p
w
10 C10 C10 C10 C10 C10 CCC/C10
w
f
n
.u
control board reads in parallel some signals:
-li
11 C11 C11 CM3 C11 CCC/C11 CM3 w
.u
t.c
w
12 C12 CM2 CM2 CCC/C12 CM2 CM2 - Calls Cn
w
p
w
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
- CCS
w
w
f
n
- MAN
-li
w
.u
- PSM
w
p
w
n
f
- PDM
n
.u
18 PSM PSM PSM PSM PSM PSM
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
- RS
w
19 PDM PDM PDM PDM PDM PDM
w
f
n
20 RS RS RS RS RS RS - RD
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
21 RD RD RD RD RD RD
w
p
w
n
22 ICV ICV ICV ICV ICV ICV
up
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
23 IF IF IF IF IF IF
t.c
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
OUTPUTS
w
p
w
f
n
.u
OUT.
-li
w
.u
t.c
TYPE A TYPE B
t.
w
w
p
w
f
n
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
-li
w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
w
.u
L0 P0-A0 P0-A0 P0-A0 A0 A0 A0 LC0-A0 LC0-A0 LC0-A0
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
L1 P1-A1 P1-A1 P1-A1 A1 A1 A1 LC1-A1 LC1-A1 LC1-A1
w
w
ft
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
.c
.
p-
w
w
ft
w
n
.u
w
p-
ft
li
w
.c
p-
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
L10 P10-A10 P10-A10 P10-A10 A10 A10 A10 LC10-A10 LC10-A10 LC10-A10
.c
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
p-
w
p-
ft
.u
.c
li
w
.u
p-
ft
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
w
L16 SAR CP2 CP2 SAR CP2 CP2 SAR CP2 CP2
p-
w
p-
ft
L17 AP1 AP1 AP1 AP1 AP1 AP1 AP1 AP1 AP1
n
.u
li
w
.u
L18 CP1 CP1 CP1 CP1 CP1 CP1 CP1 CP1 CP1
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
L19 OCC OCC OCC OCC OCC OCC OCC OCC OCC
w
.u
.c
li
w
L20 GONG GONG GONG GONG GONG GONG GONG GONG GONG
w
p-
ft
w
L21 SNR SNR SNR SNR SNR SNR SNR SNR SNR
n
li
w
.u
.c
L22 FS FS FS FS FS FS FS FS FS
p-
w
w
ft
L23 FD FD FD FD FD FD FD FD FD
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
67
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
n
NOTES
w
lif
.u
.c
Pn = Position at floor n
w
p-
t
lif
An = Arrival at floor n
w
.u
= Car’s reservation at floor n
.c
LCn
p-
w
w
w
ft
n
AP1,CP1,OCC,GONG,SNR,FS,FD,AP2,CP2,AP3,CP3 = Serialized Output signals of the contol panel.
w
.u
.c
-li
w
w
w
ft
w
p
NOTE: The serialized output signals of the control panel are always priority respect to the light signalling.
-li
w
.u
.c
p
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
-li
N.B. w
.c
ft
w
When it is programmed serial board type A, in both types of plant, arrival landing signalling has to be blinked because it
p
ft
-li
w
.u
is laid on the car position and the calls ones that are fixed lights.
.c
-li
p
w
When it is programmed serial board type B, in single automatic call systems the arrival and position signalling are
ft
n
p
.u
.c
-li
w
separated (are on different connectors) then it is possible choose fixed or blinked lights for the arrival signalling
.u
.c
ft
w
(programmable at address 5, FIXED OR BLINKED LIGHT).
p
w
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
Fixed Mapping
p
.u
-li
w
.u
As described in the preceding tables, the maximum number of floors that can be managed with car’s serial expansion
t.c
w
w
p
w
n
board is 13 for normal system (with one access), 12 for double access and 11 for systems with 3 entrances.
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
Depending on the value programmed at address 61 you can have two types of mapping for the serial outputs: fixed or
p
w
w
dynamic. Not adding the value ‘+0’ at address 61, the serial board works with fixed mapping for the outputs. So if the
p
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
total number of floors is less then 8, the first free connector is used to signal car position (no particular programming is
w
w
p
w
needed, there is an automatic configuration). So this last management is used when the maximum plant’s floors number
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
w
is 8 if car has only 1 entrance, 7 landings if it has 2 entrances and 6 if 3 entrances system.
w
w
w
Otherwise, adding the value ‘+16’ at address 60 (NUMCH) the serial board works with fixed mapping for the outputs and
p
f
n
-li
w
.u
t.c
there are two fixed mapping depending on the number of stops. If the number of stops is <= 8 you have the position
w
p
w
n
signalled with one pole for floor, if the number of stops is > 8 and <= 12 you have the position signalled with binary
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
code.
t.c
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
ITF400 ADDRESS:
w
p
w
n
up
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
p
f
n
.u
GND
-li
w +Vi
.u
CK
DA
t.c
t.
w
w
p
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
L0 C0
O0
w
I0
p
w
ft
w
L1 C1
p
O1
n
I1
.u
li
w
L2 C2
.u
.c
O2
p-
I2
w
w
L3 C3
w
ft
O3
n
I3 w
.u
L4 C4
.c
li
w
O4 I4
w
p-
ft
L5 C5
w
O5 I5
n
li
w
L6 C6
.u
O6
.c
.
I6
p-
w
w
L7 C7
O7
w
ft
I7 w
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
w
P0 C8
p-
O8
ft
w
I8
ift
P1 C9
O9
li
1 POLO FOR FLOOR
I9
.u
.c
p-
P2 C10/CCC
O10
w
I10
w
ft
P3
DISPLAY
C11/CCC/CM3
O11
n
.u
I11
.c
li
w
P4 C12/CCC/CM2
.c
O12
p-
I12
w
ft
w
P5
ft
O13 CCS
li
w
I13
.u
.c
li
P6
p-
O14 MAN
w
I14
p-
ft
P7
n
O15 CCO
I15
n
.u
.c
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
SAR/CP2
CM1
w
ft
O16 I16
n
li
w
.u
PAP
.c
li
O17
w
A1
I17
A2
p-
AP
w
p-
PSM
ft
O18 I18
A1
A2
CP
.u
PDM
li
w
OCC
O19 I19
A1
A2
.u
.c
p-
GONG RS
w
O20 I20
w
ft
-
+
O21 RD
I21
.c
li
w
-
+
UP arrow ICV
p-
O22
w
ft
I22
w
Down arrow
O23 IF
li
w
I23
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
68
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
NOTE 1:
w
lif
.u
-Add value ‘16’ at address 60 (fixed mapping).
.c
w
p-
-Program value ‘1’ or ‘3’ at address 8
t
lif
n
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
NOTE: * = same signal as table at previous page.
-li
w
w
w
ft
w
OUTPUTS
-li
w
.u
Ind.60 ‘+16’ Ind.60 ‘+0’
.c
OUTPUT
p
w
ft
n
(Fixed Mapping) (Dynamic Mapping)
n
.u
.c
-li
w The mapping depends on the number of stops (parameter NF)
.c
ft
w
p
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
stops stops NF = 2 NF = 3 NF = 4 NF = 5 NF = 7
p
w
ft
n
(NF <= 8) (NF <= 12)
p
.u
.c
-li
w
.u
.c
L0 * * * * * * *
ft
w
p
w
ft
n
L1 * * * * * * *
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
L2 * * P0 * * * *
p
w
ft
p
L3 * * P1 P0 * * *
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
L4 * * * P1 P0 * *
w
w
p
w
w
L5 * * * P2 P1 P0 *
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
L6 * * * * P2 P1 *
p
w
w
f
n
.u
L7 * * * * P3 P2 P0
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
L8 P0 * * * * P3 P1
w
p
w
w
f
cn
L9 P1 * * * * P4 P2
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
L10 P2 * * * * * P3
w
w
f
n
-li
L11 P3 * * * w * * P4
.u
t.c
w
L12 P4 A * * * * P5
p
w
n
f
n
.u
L13 P5 B * * * * P6
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
L14 P6 C * * * * *
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
L15 P7 D * * * * *
t.c
-li
p
w
L16 * * * * * * *
n
up
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
L17 * * * * * * *
t.c
w
w
L18 * * * * * * *
p
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
L19 * * * * * * *
t.c
-li
p
w
L20 * * * * * * *
p
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
L21 * * * * * * *
t.c
t.
w
w
p
w
f
L22 * * * * * * *
n
-li
w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
L23 * * * * * * *
w
p
w
ft
w
.u
li
w
.u
.c
10.2.2 SERCAR_LCD
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
The serial card SERCAR_LCD has 24 Inputs/Outputs for connecting calls and signals of service, with fast connection
.c
li
w
w
p-
AMP and also has an LCD display. There are no jumpers to set the address in the serial communication, so the card has a
w
ft
w
li
.c
.
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
w
p-
ft
w
ift
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
p-
ft
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
p-
w
p-
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
w
p-
w
p-
ft
n
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
69
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
n w w
w ift w up cn
w
.u .c w .u
.c w p- n w
-li
f w p
n w li .u t.c w
w ft w p n w
-li
ft
.u .c w .u .c
w n w
-li
f w p n
Nota:
p-
w li .u t.c w
Icon*:
w ft w p n w
-li
ft w
.u .c w .u .c
n AR-
-li w
-Alarm active;
w AR+ f p n
GND
w
-Alarm receive.
AA- w
p-
+12v
w AA+
ALM*
0
L0
li .u t.c w
I0
0
w ft w I11
n w
-li
f .u
L11 w
11
11
p-
GND +12v
.u .c w
+12v
p-
GND
n .u t.c w
1
L1 w li n
I1
p- ft w p w lif
1
Buzzer
Disabling buzzer
.c
PCP
li GND
.u w .u t.c
+12v
ft w n -li
2
L2
.c wI2
p- w f w p n
2
PAP
n li .u t.c w
0
GND
w n
PCP PAP
-li
+12v
ft w p w
3
L3
-li
I3
.u .c w ft w
3
Car push button “11”
1
n .u .c
GND
w f n
11
.c w +12v
p- w p
4
L4
0
2
n li .u t.c w
I4
4
SERCAR_LCD_03_2.4
w ft w p n w
-li
ft w
GND
.c
3
4
.u +12v
w .u .c w
L5
n
5
-li
w
PCP PAP
I5
w f n
5
w
p- w p w
0
4
t.c
GND
li .u w
70
+12v
w w p n -li .u
6
L6
ft w
I6
w p
5
ft
6
ESPANSIONI
.u .c w .u .c
n -li w
SERCAR_LCD_03_2.4
GND
w +12v
w f w p n
0
6
p-
L7
w
7
Car push buttons
w I7
.u t.c w
7
w li n -li .u
ft w
7
.u .c GND
+12v w
p- w ft w
8
L8
p-
EXPANSION
n I8
li .u .c w
8
w
0
8
p- ft w p n w lif
GND
li +12v
.u .c w
L9
t.c
9
w n 9
-li .u
I9
ft w f n
9
.u .c w
p- w
10
p- ft w lif
I10 KI t
10
li .u .c+12V w .u .c
ft w POW
n w
-li
f n
SERCAR_LCD_2.4
.c w
p-
.u t.c w p
n w li n w -li
Serial connector
.u
ft
.c w p w ft w
w n w -li .u .c w
Jumper for
w f n
Enabling call
w
p-
.u t.c w p
w li ft w p n w -li
.u .c w w ft w
To the SERCAR_LCD without expansion can be connected up to 12 calls but there are no input for the service signals.
n w
-li
f .u .c w
n
It is possible the use of some expansion boards designed for several applications. So you can connect the service signals
p-
.u t.c w p w
li ft w p n w -li .u
.c w w ft w p-
n w
-li
f .u .c w
t. w p n w lif
.
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
SERADP03: this board is supplied with a box so can be mounted on DIN rail and with screw connectors. So this
w
lif
.u
board is suitable to be mounted above the car and to collect and deliver the service signals as Inspection signals and
.c
w
p-
signals for door’s operator etc.
t
lif
n
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
-li
w
w
w
ft
w
-li
w
.u
.c
p
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
-li
w
.c
ft
w
p
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
p
w
ft
n
p
.u
.c
-li
w
.u
.c
w
SERADP04: is a little board supplied with AMP connectors and a double-sided adhesive to the back so to occupy a
ft
w
p
w
ft
-li
w
.u
small space and be easily attached to the back of the operating panel of the car. This expansion board is designed to
.c
-li
w
w
collect car’s calls (for system with number of stops greater than 12) which can not be connected directly to
p
w
ft
p
.u
-li
SERCAR_LCD board. w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
p
w
w
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
.u
t.c
p
w
n
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
The Input/Output mapping of the board SERCAR_LCD is the same of the board VEG400 so you should refer to the
t.c
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
n
up
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
p
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
w
w
p
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
w
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
.
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
w
p-
ft
w
ift
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
p-
ft
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
p-
w
p-
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
w
p-
w
p-
ft
n
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
71
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
w
lif
.u
.c
w
p-
t
10.2.3 Using Two Car’s Serial Board
lif
n
w
.u
.c
If the number of stops is greather than 13 and you want the serial connection both for car’s calls (up to 16) and for the
p-
w
w
w
ft
n
service signals, then you need to use two serial expansion board.
w
.u
.c
-li
w
The two serial boards must have two different addresses to work correctly. To SERCAR_LCD can not be assigned an
w
w
ft
w
n
address so it has always the address 0. To VEG0400 can be assigned an address through the apposite jumpers.
-li
w
.u
.c
You connect all the calls and signalling lights to the serial that is assigned the address 0, while to the other serial (that
p
w
ft
n
with address 1) you connect the service signals.
n
.u
.c
-li
w
.c
NOTE: The second serial board (the one with address 1) can not be required if you want to provide a serial connection
ft
w
p
only for car’s calls (up to 16 calls).
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
p
w
ft
n
p
0 1 2 .........................................................................23
n
.u
.c
-li
w
.u
Inputs
.c
CK
w
KI
ft
w
p
w
ft
-li
w
CONTROL VEG0400
.u
.c
-li
w
w
BOARD
p
DA
ft
Jp1
p
Add. 0
n
.u
DIN
-li
w Jp2
.u
Outputs
t.c
w
w
L0 L1 L2 ...............................................................L23
p
w
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
p
w
w
f
n
.u
-li
w 0 1 2 .........................................................................23
.u
t.c
w
Inputs
w
p
w
CK
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
w
VEG0400
w
w
w
DA
f
n
Jp1
-li
w Add.1
.u
t.c
Jp2
Outputs
w
p
w
n
L0 L1 L2 ...............................................................L23
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
w
f
In the following tables are reported the Input/Output mappings if two serial board are used (this is the mapping in the
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
worst case).
w
p
w
n
up
f
n
.u
INPUTS’ TABLE
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
3 ENTRANCES 3 ENTRANCES
p
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
Add.
t.c
t.
w
Inp. Add. 0 Add. 1 Add. 1
w
p
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
0 C0 C24 C0 C24
w
p
w
ft
w
1 C1 C25 C1 C25
n
.u
li
w
.u
.c
2 C2 C26 C2 C26
p-
w
w
w
ft
3 C3 C27 C3 C27 w
.u
.c
li
w
4 C4 C28 C4 C28
w
p-
ft
w
5 C5 C29 C5 C29
n
li
w
.u
.c
.
p-
6 C6 C30 C6 C30
w
w
w
ft
7 C7 C31 C7 C31 w
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
w
8 C8 -- C8 --
p-
ft
w
ift
9 C9 -- C9 --
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
n
n
.c
li
w
.c
p-
ft
w
ft
li
w
.c
li
p-
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
p-
ft
ft
li
w
.u
p-
w
p-
.u
li
w
.c
p-
w
w
20 C20 RS C20 RS
w
ft
w
.u
21 C21 RD C21 RD
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
li
w
.u
23 C23 IF C23 IF
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
72
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
OUTPUTS’ TABLE
w
lif
.u
.c
SINGLE AUTOMATIC CALL COLLECTIVE CALL
w
p-
t
(Up to 32 stops) (Up to 32 stops)
lif
n
w
.u
.c
TYPE A TYPE B
p-
w
w
w
ft
n
3 ENTRANCES 3 ENTRANCES 3 ENTRANCES
w
.u
.c
-li
w
w
Output Add. 0 Add. 1 Add. 0 Add. 1 Add. 0 Add. 1
ft
w
-li
L0 P0-A0 P24-A24 A0 P8 LC0-A0 LC24-A24
w
.u
.c
w
L1 P1-A1 P25-A25 A1 P9 LC1-A1 LC25-A25
p
w
ft
n
n
.u
L2 P2-A2 P26-A26 A2 P10 LC2-A2 LC26-A26
.c
-li
w
.c
w
L3 P3-A3 P27-A27 A3 P11 LC3-A3 LC27-A27
ft
w
p
ft
-li
w
L4 P4-A4 P28-A28 A4 P12 LC4-A4 LC28-A28
.u
.c
-li
w
L5 P5-A5 P29-A29 A5 P13 LC5-A5 LC29-A29
p
w
ft
n
p
.u
L6 P6-A6 P30-A30 A6 P14 LC6-A6 LC30-A30
.c
-li
w
.u
.c
ft
L7 P7-A7 P31-A31 A7 P15 LC7-A7 LC31-A31
w
p
w
ft
-li
w
L8 P8-A8 A A8 A LC8-A8 A
.u
.c
-li
w
p
L9 P9-A9 B A9 B LC9-A9 B
ft
p
.u
-li
L10 P10-A10 C A10 w C LC10-A10 C
.u
t.c
w
w
L11 P11-A11 D A11 D LC11-A11 D
p
w
w
f
.u
L12 P12-A12 E A12 E LC12-A12 E
t.c
-li
w
p
w
L13 P13-A13 AP3 A13 AP3 LC13-A13 AP3
w
f
n
.u
-li
L14 P14-A14 CP3 A14 CP3 w LC14-A14 CP3
.u
t.c
w
w
L15 P15-A15 AP2 A15 AP2 LC15-A15 AP2
p
w
w
f
cn
.u
L16 P16-A16 CP2 P0 CP2 LC16-A16 CP2
t.c
-li
w
w
w
L17 P17-A17 AP1 P1 AP1 LC17-A17 AP1
w
f
n
-li
L18 P18-A18 CP1 w
.u
p
L19 P19-A19 OCC P3 PDM LC19-A19 OCC
w
n
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
p
w
n
up
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
Adding at parameter 60 the value ‘16’ the outputs’ mapping changes as shown in the table below.
t.c
w
w
Outputs L16, L17, L18, L19 of the serial board with address 0 inicate the position with the binary code.
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
OUTPUTS’ TABLE
p
INPUTS
w
p
f
n
.u
-li
w
COLLECTIVE CALL
.u
t.c
t.
SINGLE AUTOMATIC CALL
w
w
p
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
.c
p
w
ft
w
.u
li
w
.u
.c
w
w
w
ft
.c
li
w
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
.
4 C4 L4 P4-A4 --- A4 --- LC4-A4 ---
p-
w
w
w
ft
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
ift
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
.u
.c
li
w
.c
ft
w
ft
.c
li
p-
ft
.u
.c
li
w
.u
.c
ft
w
w
ft
.c
li
w
p-
ft
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
.c
li
w
ft
w
.c
p-
ft
23 IF L23 FD FD FD IF FD FD
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
73
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
Applications
w
lif
.u
.c
1° CASE – VEG400 + VEG400
w
p-
t
lif
Using 2 VEG400: setup two different address “0” and “1” through the configuration jumper.
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
ITF400 ADRRESS:
.u
.c
-li
w
w
w
ft
w
-li
w
.u
.c
p
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
-li
w
.c
GND
+Vi
w
CK
ft
DA
w
p
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
L0 C0
w
O0 I0
p
w
ft
n
L1 C1
p
O1 I1
n
.u
.c
-li
w
L2 C2
.u
O2 I2
.c
C3
w
L3
ft
w
O3 I3
p
w
ft
n
L4 C4
-li
w
O4
.u
I4
.c
-li
w
L5 C5
O5
w
I5
p
w
ft
L6 C6
p
O6 I6
n
.u
-li
L7 wO7 C7
.u
I7
t.c
w
w
p
w
n
L8 C8
O8
w
f
I8
.u
t.c
-li
w
L9 C9
O9 I9
p
w
L10 C10
w
O10 I10
p
f
n
.u
L11 C11
O11
-li
w I11
.u
t.c
L12 C12
w
O12 I12
w
p
w
n
L13 C13
O13
w
f
I13
cn
.u
L14
t.c
-li
w
O14 C14
I14
w
L15
w
O15 C15
w
I15
p
f
n
-li
w
.u
t.c
L16 C16
O16 I16
w
p
L17
w
C17
n
O17 I17
f
n
.u
L18 C18
t.c
-li
w
O18 I18
t.c
w
L19 C19
O19
w
I19
w
f
L20
n
O20 C20
I20
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
L21
-li
O21 C21
I21
w
L22
p
w
C22
n
O22 I22
up
f
n
L23
.u
C23
t.c
O23
-li
w
I23
t.c
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
1
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
ITF400 ADDRESS:
p
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
w
w
p
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
w
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
GND
+Vi
w
ft
CK
DA
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
L24 C24
ft
w
O0 I0
n
L25 C25
li
w
O1
.u
I1
.c
.
p-
L26 C26
w
O2
w
I2
w
ft
C27
n
L27
O3 I3 w
n
.u
.c
li
w
L28 C28
O4 I4
.c
w
p-
ft
L29 C29
w
O5 I5
ift
L30 C30
li
w
O6
.u
I6
.c
p-
L31 C31
O7
w
I7
w
ft
n
INVERTED BINARY
n
.u
.c
li
w
A O8 I8
.c
p-
w
DISPLAY
ft
w
B O9 I9
ft
CCC
li
w
C O10 I10
.u
.c
li
p-
CM3
D O11 I11
w
p-
ft
E O12 CM2
I12
n
.u
.c
li
w
CCS
.u
O13
A1
AP3
A2
.c
I13
p-
ft
w
O14 MAN
CP3
A1
A2
I14
w
ft
CCO
li
w
O15
AP2
A2
A1
.u
I15
.c
li
w
p-
w
p-
ft
SAR/CP2
CM1
O16 I16
n
.u
li
w
PAP
.u
O17
A1
I17
A2
AP
.c
p-
PSM
w
O18 I18
A1
A2
CP
w
ft
PDM
w
OCC
O19 I19
A1
A2
.u
.c
li
w
GONG
O20 RS
I20
w
-
p-
ft
w
-
+
li
w
UP arrow ICV
.u
O22 I22
.c
p-
Down arrow IF
w
O23 I23
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
74
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
2° CASE – SERCAR_LCD + VEGA400
w
lif
.u
Currently the best solution to extend the calls and to have the service signals is to use a SERCAR_LCD + SERADP04
.c
w
p-
board to collect the car’s calls and use a VEG400 to collect and deliver the service signal.
t
lif
n
w
The address of the SERCAR_LCD board can not be configured and it is fixed to ‘0’. So the address of the VEG400 board
.u
.c
p-
w
w
must be set to ‘1’ through the configuration jumper.
ft
w
.u
In this way all the car’s calls (up to 24) will be connected to the SERCAR_LCD board and all the service signals will be
.c
-li
w
w
w
ft
connected to the VEG400 board.
w
-li
w
.u
.c
w
Note A: GONG and OVERLOAD signalling in the SERCAR_LCD.
p
w
ft
n
n
.u
When using a single serial board (number of floor <= 13), the outputs’ mapping provides the GONG and SNR
.c
-li
w
.c
w
(overload) signals respectively on outputs L20 – L21. The display mounted on SERCAR_LCD automatically reads
ft
w
p
ft
-li
w
.u
these outputs to activate GONG’s bell and the Oveload Alarm. When using two serial boards (number of floors >
.c
-li
w
13) the outputs’ mapping changes. On the serial board with address ‘0’ the outputs L20 and L21 are used to signal
p
w
ft
n
p
.u
the positions of floors P4 and P5. So the GONG’s bell and the overload Alarm will activate when the car reaches the
.c
-li
w
.u
.c
ft
w
floor 4 and floor 5. To avoid this situation you must jumper the pin 3 and pin 4 of the programming connector as
p
w
ft
-li
w
.u
shown in the figure below.
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
p
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
p
w
w
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
.u
t.c
p
w
n
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
SNR (overload) and GONG signals will be no more used in the display.
t.c
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
p
w
When using a single serial board (number of floor <= 13), the inputs’ mapping provides the connection of PCP
n
up
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
(Door closing) pushbutton and PAP (Door opening) pushbutton respectively on inputs I15 and I17. The
t.c
w
w
SERCAR_LCD board provides two additional AMP connectors for these signals. This signals are connected in
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
p
w
p
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
w
w
p
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
w
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
.
p-
w
w
When using two serial board (number of floors > 13) these two connectors can not be more used as the inputs’
w
ft
w
n
.u
.c
li
w
mapping changes. The inputs for PAP signals and PCP signals move on the second serial board, the one with adrress
.c
w
p-
ft
‘1’.
w
ift
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
p-
ft
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
p-
w
p-
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
w
p-
w
p-
ft
n
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
75
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
10.3 SERIAL BOARD FOR EXTERNAL CALLS
w
lif
.u
.c
w
These expansion boards are used to collect the floors’ calls and trasmit them through the serial connectin to the control
p-
t
lif
n
w
board. In addition, these cards also provide the light signals for the floors and the alarm signals.
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
10.3.1 Floors’ Serial boards (VEG602, VEG701, FLOORDIS, VEG800,
.c
-li
w
w
w
ft
w
ITF800,LCD600,LCD601)
-li
w
.u
.c
Inputs/Outputs mapping for floors’ serial boards
p
w
ft
n
This boards have 2 inputs used for the floors’ call pushbuttons and two output used for the floors’ light signal.
n
.u
.c
-li
w
.c
w
In the tables below are shown the function of each input and each output. The functions associated to the inputs and to the
ft
w
p
ft
-li
w
outputs depend on the operation mode of the system: Single Automatic Call System or Collective Call System.
.u
.c
-li
w
The function of the L1 output depends on the value programmed at address 10 too.
p
w
ft
n
p
.u
.c
-li
w
.u
.c
INPUTS’ MAPPING
ft
w
p
w
ft
-li
w
Single Automatic Call Collective Call
.u
.c
-li
w
p
Input
ft
p
.u
-li
0 CEx (External Call) w
Dx (Down Reservation)
.u
t.c
w
w
1 -- Sx (Up Reservation)
p
w
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
p
OUTPUTS’ MAPPING
w
w
f
n
.u
-li
Single Automatic Call Collective Call w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
Output
w
w
f
cn
.u
OCC (‘Busy’ light signal)
t.c
-li
w
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
.u
t.c
SA (‘Alarm Active’ light signal) SA (‘Alarm Active’ light signal) Programmable function at
w
L1
p
w
n
f
n
.u
address 10
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
NOTE: In the case of universal plant you can decide to use the L1 output as present signal or as an alarm signal (set
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
p
w
n
up
f
n
.u
CONTROL BOARD
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
w
Min. size 0,5mm
w
p
w
f
n
Until to 10 floor
-li
w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
w
ICARO DISPLAY
p
w
ft
w
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
FLOOR 9
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
CB_VG0017
.u
.c
.
p-
w
w
w
ft
CB_VG0002
n
w
n
.u
VEG800
.c
li
w
CL White
.c
w
p-
ft
KE Yellow
w
ift
20 Brown
li
w
.u
CEX Green
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
p-
ft
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
ICARO DISPLAY
li
p-
w
p-
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
FLOOR 0
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
w
p-
w
p-
ft
n
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
VEG800
w
ft
w
.u
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
76
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
n w w
w ift w up cn
w
.u .c w .u
.c w p- n w
-li
f w p
n w li .u t.c w
w ft w p n w
-li
ft
.c
CEX
.u n w -li .u .c
w p- w f w p n
w
20
li .u t.c w
J4
J3
J2
J1
w w p n -li
BZ1
ft w ft w
KE
.u .c w .u .c
n w
-li
f w p n w
CL
w
p-
li .u t.c w w
Serial device
Serial device
w ft w n w
-li
f .u
KE
w n
20
CL
p- ft w p w lif
CEX
li .u .c w .u t.c
w n -li
Serial connector
PINOUT JP1-JP2
ft p- w f w p n
.c w .u t.c
n w
J3
J4
li
J3
J4
w ft w p n w
-li
Buzzer w
ft
VEG800
.u .c w
Collective
-li .c
ft w n w
-li
f .u n
w p
Serial connector
Serial connector
p-
20
CL
.c
20
KE
CL
w
KE
CEX
CEX
t.c
Buzzer
.u w
20
n
CL
20
KE
CL
li
KE
CEX
CEX
w n
Buzzer
-li
ft w p w
Up Push-button and light
Dw Push-button and light
.u .c w .u
ft
.c w
w n w
-li
f w p n w
ON
w .u t.c w
ON
77
w n -li .u
2 3
w n -li
2 3
.u .c w
4
p- w f w 4
p n w
5
w
1 2 3 4 5 6
.u t.c w
ON
5
li
6
w ft w n -li .u
6
.c p- w ft w
Type of plant
.u w
1
p-
20
CL
L0
20
.c
CL
L1
n li .u w
0
1
20
w
CL
L0
n
20
CL
L1
floor
p-
.u
ft
.c w p w lif
li w
Jumper for
n -li .u t.c
ft w w f w n
J1
J2
.u .c p-
n w .u t.c w
p-
programming of the
li
J2
J1
w n
.u .c w .u .c w
VEG800 jumper version
w n w
-li
f w p n
Present light/SA( Alarm active signal)
p-
w li .u t.c w
w ft w p n w
-li
ft w
.u .c w .u .c
n w
VEG800 dip-switch version
-li
p- w f t.c w p n w
li .u n w -li .u
ft
.c w p w ft w
n w -li .u .c w
p-
w f t. w p n w lif
.
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
w
lif
.u
.c
ITF800 Rev.03
w
p-
t
lif
n
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
Serial Board for landing commands
ft
w
.u
.c
-li
w
-4 Led for diagnostics;
w
w
ft
w
p
-Connect up to 2 push buttons and 2 lights or arrows managements;
n
PINOUT JP1-JP2
-li
w
.u
.c
-programmable minigong and beep for push button pressing
w
Serial connector
p
w
ft
n
-Programming with jumper or dip-switch
n
.u
.c
-li
w DEX External serial data
.c
ft
w
p
ft
n
-Supply current: 40mA max DEX GND KE GND Power supply (-)
-li
w
.u
VIM
.c
-li
p
w
ft
n
p
.u
.c
-li
w
.u
.c
ft
w
p
w
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
w
Type of plant
p
w
ft
p
.u
-li
Collective w Single call
.u
t.c
w
w
p
J1 Dw Push-button and light Push button and “busy” signal
w
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
p
w
w
f
n
.u
J3 Serial connector Serial diagnostic:
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
DL1:
w
J4 Serial connector
p
w
w
f
cn
.u
DL1 Diagnostic serial
t.c
-li
w
w
w
DL2 Diagnostic serial serial signals correctly.
w
f
n
-li
DL3 Status up push-button w
-Fast blinking= Serial Wiring incorrect or broken, serial
.u
t.c
p
DL4 Status dw push-button disable from control board or board in programming (jumper
w
n
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
w
w
f
DL2: Slow blinking= run the system (1 sec on and 1 sec off);
n
-li
w
f
t.c
-li
p
w
n
up
OFF ON
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
DL4
w
w
f
n
-li
DL3 w
f
.u
t.c
-li
Jumper version
w
p
w
p
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
Jumper per la
t.c
t.
w
w
p
w
f
programmazione
n
-li
w
f
.u
p
w
ft
w
.u
li
w
.u
.c
DL3 J1
p-
w
w
w
ft
J4 w
.u
.c
li
w
DL1 DL2
w
p-
ft
ON
w
li
w
.u
J3
.c
.
p-
w
w
w
J2
ft
BZ1 DL4 w
n
.u
.c
li
w
w
Serial device
p-
ft
w
ift
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
.u
.c
li
w
.c
p-
ft
w
ft
.c
li
p-
programming of
w
p-
ft
n
n
the floor
.u
.c
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
ft
.c
DL3
li
w
J1
p-
w
p-
ft
J4
n
.u
li
w
DL1 DL2
.u
DIP-switch
.c
p-
ON
w
w
ft
J3
.u
.c
li
w
1 2 3 4 5 6
w
p-
BZ1
w
J2
ft
w
DL4
n
li
w
.c
p-
w
Serial device
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
78
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
w
lif
.u
.c
w
Jumper version
p-
t
lif
n
w
.u
.c
p-
w
1) Insert the jumper programming (DL1 LED blinking fast);
w
w
ft
w
.u
2) Press a button (J3 or J4) No. times to the depending floor (first floor 1 pressure):
.c
-li
w
w
w
ft
w
p
each press of the button, the buzzer sounds a short beep.
-li
w
.u
.c
w
3) Remove the jumper programming to save the address of the floor;
p
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
-li
w
4) To verify the programmed address, power cycle the board with jumper.
.c
ft
w
p
ft
n
The buzzer will No. beep depending of the stored floor.
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
p
w
ft
n
p
.u
N° Floor N° pressure
.c
-li
w
.u
.c
ft
w
0 1
p
w
ft
-li
w
.u
1 2
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
2 3
p
.u
direction is available only in the
-li
w
.u
3 4
t.c
w
w
p
w
model ITF801.
n
4 5
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
p
w
w
f
n
.u
6 7
-li
calls are not handled. w
.u
t.c
w
7 8
w
p
w
w
f
cn
.u
8 9
t.c
-li
w
w
w
... ...
w
f
n
-li
w
.u
N N+1
t.c
p
w
n
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
Dip-switch:
w
Dip switch version
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
6 5 4 3 2 1 FLOOR
w
n
up
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
p
OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON 3
w
DIP-SWITCH
p
f
n
.u
OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 4
-li
w
.u
6=ON
t.c
t.
w
OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON 5
w
p
w
f
n
-li
You enable the w
f
.c
-li
w
w
OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON 7
p
w
ft
arrow next
w
.u
OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 8
li
w
.u
.c
direction*
p-
w
OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON 9
w
w
ft
.c
li
w
w
OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON 11
p-
ft
w
Note:
n
.c
.
*If use also the inputs for the collection
p-
w
w
w
ft
.u
.c
li
w
OFF OFF ON ON ON ON 15
.c
w
opportunely configured.
p-
ft
w
ift
li
w
.u
.c
ft
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
p-
ft
.u
.c
li
w
OFF ON OFF ON ON ON 23
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
ft
li
w
.u
p-
w
p-
.u
li
w
OFF ON ON OFF ON ON 27
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
w
.u
OFF ON ON ON OFF ON 29
.c
li
w
w
p-
OFF ON ON ON ON OFF 30
w
ft
w
OFF ON ON ON ON ON 31
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
79
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
w
LCD600-601 Display Icaro con la raccolta delle chiamate di piano:
w
lif
.u
.c
w
p-
t
LCD600 LCD601
lif
n
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
.c
-li
w
w
w
ft
w
-li
w
.u
.c
p
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
-li
w
.c
ft
w
p
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
p
w
ft
n
p
External serial
n
.u
.c
-li
w
.u
ft
w
p
w
LED’S DIAGNOSTIC:
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
w
p
w
ft
switch on. L0 (Push-button P0) and L1 (push-button P1)
p
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
OFF ON
w
w
LED DIAGNOSTIC
p
w
w
L0
f
SERIAL
.u
t.c
-li
w
LCD600
w
L1
p
w
w
DL2
f
n
.u
-li
w Serial diagnostic:
.u
LED
t.c
w
w
DIAGNOSTIC
DL2: Slow blinking= run the system (1 sec on and 1 sec
p
w
n
DL1
w
PUSH- BUTTON
f
cn
.u
off);
t.c
P1
-li
w
w
P0
w
DL1: Slow blinking, the display riceve the serial signals.
w
f
n
-li
w Fast blinking= Serial Wiring incorrect or broken,
.u
L1
t.c
L0
w
or menù 1=32.
p
w
n
SW2 SW1
f
n
.u
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
n
up
f
n
.u
Push-button Push-button
t.c
-li
w
Down reservation
t.c
Up reservation
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
t.c
-li
p
w
p
f
n
.u
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
w
w
p
w
f
n
CONTROL BOARD
-li
w
f
.u
.c
-li
w
w
Serial external
p
w
ft
w
.u
li
w
.u
p-
w
w
NOTE:
w
ft
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
.c
.
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
w
p-
ft
w
ift
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.c
p-
ft
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
p-
w
p-
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
w
ft
li
w
.u
.c
li
w
p-
w
p-
.u
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
.c
li
w
w
p-
ft
w
Floor -1 FLOOR 30
li
FLOOR 0
w
.u
.c
p-
*MENU 1 = 31
w
*MENU 1 = 0 *MENU 1 = 1
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
80
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
w
lif
n
w
.u
t.c
p-
w
w
lif
n
.u
w
t.c
p-
w
10.3.2 Collecting external calls with VEG400
w
lif
.u
.c
The board VEG400 can be used to collect the external calls too. To do this you must connect the VEG400 board to the
w
p-
t
external serial channel as shown in the figure and program the control board adding at address 61 the value ‘+1’.
lif
n
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
w
ft
w
.u
KE 0 1 2 ........................................................23
.c
-li
w
w
w
Inputs
ft
w
-li
w
Control CK
.u
.c
w
Board DEX VEG400
p
w
ft
DA
n
n
.u
.c
-li
w Outputs
.c
ft
w
p
L0 L1 L2 ..............................................L23
ft
-li
w
.u
.c
-li
As for car calls, when collecting external calls with the VEG400 board, may be necessary two serial board depending on
p
w
ft
n
p
.u
.c
-li
w
.u
.c
ft
Less then 12, one serial board is sufficient.
w
p
w
ft
-li
w
Equal to12, you can use one serial board, but FS and FD signals are not available.
.u
.c
-li
w
p
More then 12 (up to 16), you must use 2 serial boards. Up to the 12th landing, light signal and call’s pushbuttons are
ft
p
.u
connected to the serial board with address 0; for the other landings, light signals and call’s pushbutton are connected
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
to the second serial board (the one with address 1). The signals for the UP/DOWN direction light arrows (FS,FD) are
p
w
w
f
.u
also connected to the second serial board (address 1).
t.c
-li
w
p
w
w
f
n
.u
In the tables below is shown the Inputs\Outpus mapping when using the car’s serial board to collect the external calls.
-li
w
.u
t.c
w
w
p
w
w
f
cn
.u
t.c
-li
INPUTS
w
OUTPUTS
w
w
w
f
SINGLE AUTOMATIC CALL COLLECTIVE CALL
n
-li
w
.u
t.c
p
w
n
0 CE0 CE12 D0 D12
f
.u
t.c
-li
w
w
L1 AS0 AS12 LS0 LS12
w
w
f
n
-li
w
f
.u
t.c
-li
p
w
n
up
.u
L4 AD2 AD14 LD2 LD14
t.c
-li
w
t.c
w
L5 AS2 AS14 LS2 LS14
w
f
n
-li
w
f
t.c
-li
p
w
p
f
n
.u
8 CE4 CE16 D4 D16 L8 AD4 AD16 LD4 LD16
-li
w
.u
t.c
t.
w
9 CE4 CE16 S4 S16
w
f
n
-li
w
f
w
11 CE5 CE17 S5 S17
p
w
ft
.u
12 CE6 CE18 D6 D18
li
w
.c
p-
w
w
ft
w
.u
ft
li
w
.
p-
w
w
ft
w
n
.u
.c
li
18 CE9
w
w
p-
ft
w
li
w
.u
ft
.u
.c
li
w
p-
ft
w
.c
li
p-
w
p-
ft
NOTES
n
.u
.c
li
w
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
= landing call push button at floor ‘n’ (single automatic call systems)
w
ft
CEn
n
li
w
.u
Dn
p-
w
p-
ft
.u
li
w
ADn
.c
p-
w
w
ft
ASn
n
w
.u
.c
LDn
w
p-
ft
LSn
n
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
NOTE: The address selection of the two car’s serial boards when used to collect the esternal calls, is the
w
ft
n
n
.u
.c
p-
ft
w
81
li
w
.u
.c
p-
w
w
ft
n
.u
-li
w
.c
n w w
w ift w up cn
w
.u .c w .u
.c w p- n w
-li
f w p
n w li .u t.c w
w ft w p n w
-li
ft
.u .c w .u .c
w p- n w
-li
f w p n
w li .u t.c w
w ft w p n w
-li
ft w
.u .c w .u .c
n w
-li
f w p n w
w
p-
li .u t.c w w
w ft w p- n w
-li
f w
.u
.u .c w
Version chronology:
.u t.c p-
n w li ft w p n w
p-
li .u .c w w lif
t.c
ft w n w
-li
f .u
V4.3.079…Management gray code
.c w
p- t.c w p n
n w li .u n w -li
ft w p w w
V4.3.089…Management A3 emendament;
-li .u .c w ft
n -li .u .c
V4.3.062…Addition “input To” Management
ft
.c w p- w f w p n
n w li .u t.c w
w ft w p n w
-li
ft w
.u .c w
V4.3.094… Management self-leveling in systems rope;
w n w
-li
f .u .c w
w
p- t.c w p n w
li .u w
82
w ft w p n w
-li
ft w
.u
p
.u .c w .u .c
w n w
-li
f w p n w
w
p-
li .u t.c w w
….Management systems multiplex with MCU board, disaligned.
w ft w p- n w
-li
ft w
.u
.u .c w .u .c p-
n w li ft w p n w
p-
li .u .c w w lif
t.c
ft w n w
-li
f .u n
V4.3.039… Management Support new serial displays LCD600-601- TFT5.7”-TFT210;
.u .c w
p-
.u t.c w p-
n w li ft w p n w
p-
li .u .c w w lif
t
ft w n w
-li
f .u .c
.c w
p- t.c w p n
n w li .u n w -li
.u
ft
.c w p w ft w
w n w -li .u .c w
w
p- w f t.c w p n
w li .u n w -li
.u
ft
.c w p w ft w
n w -li .u .c w
p- w f t.c w p n w
li .u n w -li .u
ft
.c w p w ft w
n w -li .u .c w
p-
w f t. w p n w lif
.